Location via proxy:   [ UP ]  
[Report a bug]   [Manage cookies]                

Oimlr117 2 2CD

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 181

ORGANISATION

INTERNATIONALE
DE MTROLOGIE
LGALE
SECOND COMMITTEE
DRAFT (2CD)
Date: 21 December 2013
Reference number:

OIML TC 8 / SC 3
Recommendation: OIML R117-2 (2CD)

Title: Dynamic Measuring Systems for


Liquids other than Water
Part 2: Metrological controls
and performance tests
Co-Secretariats:
Germany
United States

TITLE OF THE 2CD (English):

OIML R 117-2
Dynamic Measuring Systems for Liquids other than Water
Part 2: Metrological controls and performance tests
Note : Some text highlighted to encourage close review of certain sections
(Highlight will be removed before publication)

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 1 of 181

EXPLANATORY NOTE

(This explanatory note will be deleted in the R117-2 document before final publication.)
Work originally started on the effort to produce an R117 test methods document in the
period of 1997 2004. This work was led by Germany and the Netherlands. In 2004, it was
decided to delay work on the test methods document until after approval and publication of
R117-1 General Requirements.
After publication of OIML R117-1 in 2008, an international working group (IWG) was
formed to create R117-2. The United States serves as the chair of the IWG with significant
on-going participation from several other member states. The IWG met several times, and
distributed the first committee draft of R117-2 in 2011. In 2012, the IWG was reestablished as an OIML Project Group (PG) according to the new OIML directives for the
technical work and many new project group P-members were added. In addition to the inperson meetings, the IWG/PG has also held over 40 web-based meetings to continue to
accelerate the work effort.
The Project Group chair would like to take this opportunity to thank the PG participants for
all of their hard work on this document and to thank the nations that have graciously hosted
the PG meetings.
Some special notes concerning the 2CD of R117-2:
Because of its size and complexity, this document (OIML R117-2) currently only
covers metrological controls and performance tests for type evaluation.
After receiving international comments on the 1CD (in 2011), the following new
items are included with the package that accompanies the 2CD of R117-2:
o Responses to international comments on the 1CD;
o Annex E Measuring Systems for Beer + Milk + other foaming potable liquids;
o Annex F Pipelines + Ship Loading Systems; and
o Annex G Aircraft Fueling Systems
Some newly developed items in this document (R117-2), if approved, will
necessitate an amendment of some of the corresponding requirements sections of
R117-1. An attempt has been made to clearly mark these items in R117-2. The most
significant of these changes include the removal of Annex A from R117-1 (now part of
Section 4 of R117-2) and a change that makes endurance testing only relevant for
meters with moving parts (Section 5.4).

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 2 of 181

FOREWORD
The International Organization of Legal Metrology (OIML) is a worldwide,
intergovernmental organization whose primary aim is to harmonize the regulations and
metrological controls applied by the national metrology services, or related organizations, of
its Member States.
The two main categories of OIML publications are:

International Recommendations (OIML R), which are model regulations that establish
the metrological characteristics required of certain measuring instruments and which
specify methods and equipment for checking their conformity; the OIML Member
States shall implement these Recommendations to the greatest possible extent;

International Documents (OIML D), which are informative in nature and intended to
improve the work of the metrological services.

OIML Draft Recommendations and Documents are developed by technical committees or


subcommittees which are formed by the Member States. Certain international and regional
institutions also participate on a consultation basis.
Cooperative agreements are established between OIML and certain institutions, such as ISO
and IEC, with the objective of avoiding contradictory requirements; consequently,
manufacturers and users of measuring instruments, test laboratories, etc. may apply
simultaneously OIML publications and those of other institutions.
International Recommendations and International Documents are published in French (F) and
English (E) and are subject to periodic revision.
This publication, OIML R 117-2, edition 20XX (E) was developed by the OIML Technical
Subcommittee TC8/SC3 Dynamic measurement of liquids other than water. It was approved
for final publication by the International Committee of Legal metrology in 20XX.
OIML publications may be obtained from the Organizations headquarters:
Bureau International de Mtrologie Lgale
11, rue Turgot 75009 Paris France
Telephone: 33 (0) 1 48 78 12 82 and 42 85 27 11
Fax: 33 (0) 1 42 82 17 27
E-mail: biml@oiml.org
Internet: www.oiml.org

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 3 of 181

CONTENTS
Explanatory note .

Foreword .

Annex List

Scope ........

Metrological controls .......

Symbols, units and equations ...

10

Type evaluation performance tests ...


4.1
General
4.2
Uncertainties of measurement .
4.3
Reference conditions ..
4.4
Test Volumes .
4.5
Prevention of the influence of the liquid temperature .
4.6
Software setting/configuration
4.7
Reverse Flow .
4.8
Influence factor tests ...
4.9
Disturbance tests
4.10 Tests for EUTs powered by a road vehicle battery

14
14
14
15
15
15
16
16
16
23
39

Testing procedures for meter sensors and measuring devices .


5.1
General information .
5.2
Test equipment .
5.3
Accuracy ...
5.4
Endurance test ..
5.5
Accuracy on the minimum measured quantity .
5.6
Additional testing procedures - electronic measuring devices
(sensor + transducer) ...

43
43
45
46
50
51

52

Test Procedures for electronic calculators (that may be equipped


with a conversion device), indicating devices and associated devices... 54
6.1
General Information .. 54
6.2
Electronic calculators and indicating devices 55
6.3
Conversion device (as part of an electronic calculator) 56
6.4
Associated Measuring Devices . 59
6.5
Temperature conversion: Tests on response time
of the temperature measurement and indication ... 60
Testing procedures for gas elimination devices
7.1
General information ..
7.2
Testing ..

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

62
62
63

Page 4 of 181

Testing Procedures for Ancillary Devices .


8.1
General Info ..
8.2
Disturbance and Influence Factor tests on ancillary devices
8.3
Printing Devices
8.4
Memory/Storage Devices .
8.5
Conversion Devices (not part of an electronic calculator)

75
75
76
77
78
79

Annexes ------- Complete Measuring Systems


Testing procedures for fuel dispensers .

80

Testing procedures for LPG Dispensers ...

88

Annex B.

Testing procedures for Road Tankers ..

97

Annex E.

Testing procedures for measuring systems for milk,


beer, and other foaming potable liquids 102

Annex F.

Testing procedures for measuring systems on pipelines


and systems for the loading of ships .

119

Testing procedures for measuring systems intended


for the fuelling of aircraft ..

121

Annex A.

Annex A-LPG.

Annex G.

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Annex X.

Annex of Advice and Suggested Practices .


X.2 .
X.5 .
X.7 .
X.A
X.A-LPG
X.E .
X.G .

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

123
123
127
133
142
156
168
179

Page 5 of 181

R117-2
Annex List

Test Procedures for Complete Measuring Systems


Annex A

A
and
A-LPG

Fuel dispensers
Blend dispensers

----------------------------------------------------------Annex A-LPG

Fuel dispensers for liquefied gases under pressure


(LPG dispensers)

B
C*

D*

Measuring systems on road tankers


Measuring systems for the unloading of ships' tanks and for
rail and road tankers using an intermediate tank
Measuring systems for liquefied gases under pressure
(other than LPG dispensers)

Measuring systems for milk, beer, and other foaming potable


liquids

Measuring systems on pipelines and systems for loading ships

Measuring systems intended for the refuelling of aircraft

H*

Self service arrangements with fuel dispensers

I*

Other self service arrangements

J*

Unattended delivery

K*

Measuring systems for bunker fuel (to be added later)

L*

Measuring systems for liquefied natural gas (LNG) (to be added later)

Annex of Advice and Suggested Practices

* these Annexes are still under development (they are planned to be added at a later date in
a future revision of this document)

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 6 of 181

Dynamic Measuring Systems for Liquids


other than Water
Part 2: Metrological Controls and performance tests
1 Scope
1.1
This Recommendation specifies the metrological and technical requirements
applicable to dynamic measuring systems for quantities (volume or mass) of liquids other than
water subject to legal metrology controls. It also provides requirements for the approval of
specific components of the measuring systems (meter, electronic calculator, etc.).
1.2
In principle, this Recommendation applies to all measuring systems fitted with a
meter as defined in T.m.3 (continuous measurement), whatever be the measuring principle of
the meters or their application, except:
Dynamic measuring devices and systems for cryogenic liquids (OIML R 81),
Water meters for the metering of cold potable water and hot water (OIML R 49-1, R
49-2 and R 49-3),
Heat meters (OIML R 75-1, R 75-2 and R 75-3).
1.3
This Recommendation is not intended to prevent the development of new
technologies.
1.4
National or international regulations are expected to clearly specify which measuring
systems for liquids other than water are subject to legal metrology controls. For waste water
measurement, it is up to the national authorities to decide whether the use of measuring systems
conforming to this Recommendation is mandatory, and which accuracy class is required.
1.5
Part 2 of this Recommendation (OIML R117-2) specifies the metrological controls
and performance tests to meet the metrological and technical requirements of OIML R117-1
for:
the type evaluation of complete measuring systems;
the type evaluation of constituent elements of a measuring system that
are approved for separate type approval; and
the initial verification of complete measuring systems.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 7 of 181

Metrological control

2.1

Type evaluation and approval

Measuring systems subject to legal metrology control shall be subject to type evaluation and
approval.
In addition, the constituent elements of a measuring system, mainly those listed below, and
the sub-systems which include several of these elements (for example, a flowcomputer), are
able to receive separate type approval upon the request of the manufacturer:
meter;
measuring device;
meter sensor;
transducer;
electronic calculator;
indicating device;
gas separator;
gas extractor;
special gas extractor;
conversion device;
ancillary devices providing or memorizing measurements results:
o printing device;
o memory device
o self-service device;
temperature measuring device or sensor;
pressure measuring device or sensor;
density measuring device or sensor.
See also Annex X.2.1 (at the beginning of Annex X of R117-2) on General metrological
requirements for specific components of a measuring system for a chart that shows the
components that are able to receive a separate type approval cross-referenced with sections
from R117-1 that apply to each component.
Note:

In some countries, the expressions type evaluation and "type approval" can be
reserved for complete measuring systems. In this case, it is advisable that types of
constituent elements be submitted to a procedure similar to type approval, making
it possible to certify the conformity of the type of a constituent element to the
regulation.

The constituent elements of a measuring system shall comply with the relevant requirements
even when they have not been subject to separate type evaluation (except in the case of
ancillary devices and additional devices that are exempted from the controls).
Unless otherwise specified in this Recommendation, a measuring system shall fulfil the
requirements without adjustment of the system or of its elements during the course of the tests.
Relevant tests belonging together should be carried out on the same measuring system or
element, under the same conditions and without adjustment. If, however, an adjustment has
been performed or tests have been conducted with another measuring system and/or device
this shall be documented and justified in the test report.
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 8 of 181

Any exceptions to the test procedures described in R117-2 must be fully and clearly
documented in the type evaluation report.

2.2

Initial Verification

Measuring systems subject to legal metrology control shall be subject to initial verification.
The object of the initial verification is to verify the compliance of complete measuring
systems with the requirements described in R117-1 Section 6.2 and ensure the systems
conforms to its approved type before those systems are place into service.
Test procedures for the initial verification of complete measuring systems are not yet
complete; when they are complete, these test procedures will be found in the individual
annexes of this recommendation.
Note 1: Some of the draft initial verification test procedures for complete measuring
systems can be found in Annex X (advice and suggested practices).
Temporary Note (2): a decision to not include initial verification test procedures in the
Annexes of the 2CD of R117-2 was made at a Project Group meeting in Teddington in
October 2013. Instead, these test procedures are planned to be part of the next revision
cycle of R117.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 9 of 181

Symbols, units and equations


In this Recommendation the following symbols, units and equations are used :
CID
NCU
EUT
MPE
RH
e
f
i
K

Calculator and indicating device


National currency unit
Equipment under test
Maximum permissible error
Relative humidity
Scale interval (L, kg) of the main indicating device
Frequency of pulses sent to the CID (pulses per second)
Number of pulses sent to the CID
Variable determined by the ratio Qmin/Qmax and the number of flowrates for
accuracy testing

mmq
nF
NF
Pu
pt
pmin
pmax

Qs
Q
Qmin
Qmax
Qa

Q min
Q max

1
NF 1

Minimum measured quantity (L or kg --- see also Vmin)


Sequence number of a flowrate test
Number of flowrates for accuracy testing
Indicated unit price (NCU/L, NCU/kg)
Pressure of the liquid passing through the meter or the measurement transducer
(bar)
Minimum pressure of the liquid passing through the meter or the measurement
transducer (bar)
Maximum pressure of the liquid passing through the meter or the measurement
transducer (bar)
Q K n F 1 Qmax
Dynamic viscosity of the liquid (mPas)
Simulated flowrate of the liquid (L/min, kg/min)
Flowrate of liquid (L/min, kg/min)
Minimum flowrate of liquid (L/min, kg/min)
Maximum flowrate of liquid (L/min, kg/min)
Flowrate of air (L/min, kg/min)

t
Ts
Tr
Tt

Time (s)
Temperature of the liquid in the standard capacity measure (C)
Reference temperature of the standard capacity measure (C)
Temperature of the liquid passing through the meter or measurement
transducer (C)

Vmin
Vi
Vs

Minimum measured quantity - volume (L)


Indicated volume at metering conditions by the CID (L)
Volume indication of the standard capacity measure (L)

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 10 of 181

Vr
Vm
Vp
Vc
Vn
Va
Mi
Ms
Mb
Mm

Volume indication of the standard capacity measure, compensated from the


deviation of the reference temperature (L)
Volume at metering conditions stored by the CID if the CID is fitted with a
memory device (L)
Printed volume at metering conditions if the CID is fitted with a printing
device (L)
Volume at metering conditions calculated from the number of simulated pulses
i and the k-factor kf (L)
Volume at metering conditions (L) passing through the meter compensated for
deviation from reference temperature of the standard capacity measure and
pressure and temperature of the liquid
Volume of air (L)

Mp
Mc

Indicated mass CID (kg)


Mass indication of the weighing instrument (kg)
Mass indication of the weighing instrument, corrected for the buoyancy (kg)
Indicated mass stored by the CID if the CID is fitted with a memory device
(kg)
Printed mass if the CID is fitted with a printing device (kg)
Mass calculated from the number of simulated pulses i and the k-factor kf (kg)

kf

k-factor, number of pulses per unit of quantity (pulses/L, pulses/kg)


Cubic expansion coefficient of the test liquid due to temperature (C-1)
Compressibility coefficient of the test liquid (bar-1)
Cubic expansion coefficient of the standard capacity measure due to
temperature (C-1)

Notes : For the determination of refer to OIML R 63 or ISO 91-1 for petroleum
products.
For the determination of refer to API Manual of Petroleum
Measurements Standards Chapter 11.2.1 for petroleum products (new fuels
issues, including E10)
If

is not known, the following values can be used.


Material
Borosilica glass
Glass
Mild steel
Stainless steel
Copper, Brass
Aluminium

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

(C-1)
(uncertainty : 5 x 10-6 C -1)
10 x 10-6
27 x 10-6
33 x 10-6
51 x 10-6
53 x 10-6
69 x 10-6

Page 11 of 181

Pi
Pm
Pp
Pc
Evi
Evm
Evp
Eva
Emi
Emm
Emp
Ema

Indicated price (price to pay) by the CID (NCU)


Price stored by the CID if the CID is fitted with a memory device (NCU)
Printed price if the CID is fitted with a printing device (NCU)
Calculated price (NCU)
Error of indicated volume at metering conditions (%)
Error of stored volume at metering conditions if the CID is fitted with a
memory device (%)
Error of printed volume at metering conditions if the CID is fitted with a
printing device (%)
Error of indicated volume at metering conditions resulting of the presence of
air (%)
Error of indicated mass (%)
Error of stored mass if the CID is fitted with a memory device (%)
Error of printed mass if the CID is fitted with a printing device (%)
Error of indicated mass resulting of the presence of air (%)

Intrinsic error of the instrument at metering conditions (%)


Intrinsic error at metering conditions obtained at the first accuracy test (%)
1
Intrinsic error at metering conditions obtained at the second accuracy test (%)
2
Intrinsic error at metering conditions obtained at the third accuracy test (%)
3
Evi(B) Error of indicated volume at metering conditions before the endurance test (%)
Evi(A) Error of indicated volume at metering conditions after the endurance test (%)
Emi(B) Error of indicated mass, at metering conditions, before the endurance test (%)
Emi(A) Error of indicated mass, at metering conditions, conditions after the endurance
test (%)
Epi
Error of indicated price (NCU)
Epm Error of stored price if the CID is fitted with a memory device (NCU)
Epp
Error of printed price if the CID is fitted with a printing device (NCU)

Mean value of errors (%, NCU, C, bar)


n
Number of tests at the same condition
Qs
=
60 x i / (kf x t)
Vc
=
i / kf
Mc
=
i / kf
Pc
=
Vi x Pu, Mi x Pu
Vr
=
Vs x [1 + (Ts - Tr)]
Vn
=
Vr x [1 + (Tt - Ts)] x [1 - pt]
Evi
=
[(Vi - Vc) / Vc] x 100 Vc may be replaced by Vr or Vn , if appropriate
Evm
=
[(Vm - Vc) / Vc] x 100 Vc may be replaced by Vr or Vn , if appropriate
Evp
=
[(Vp - Vc) / Vc] x 100 Vc may be replaced by Vr or Vn , if appropriate
Eva
=
[(Vi - Vc) / Vc ] x 100 Vc may be replaced by Vr or Vn , if appropriate
Emi
=
[(Mi - Mc) / Mc] x 100 Vc
Mc may be replaced by Mb, if appropriate
Emm =
[(Mm - Mc) / Mc] x 100
Mc may be replaced by Mb, if appropriate
Emp
=
[(Mp - Mc) / Mc] x 100
Mc may be replaced by Mb, if appropriate
Ema
=
[(Mi - Mc) / Mc] x 100 Vc
Epi
=
Pi - Pc
Epm
=
Pm - Pc
Epp
=
Pp - Pc

=
[E(1) + E(2) + ... + E(n)] / n
0

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 12 of 181

m3

=
=
=
=
=
=

[(Vi - Vc) / Vc]1 x 100 Vc may be replaced by Vr or Vn , if appropriate


[(Vi - Vc) / Vc]2 x 100 Vc may be replaced by Vr or Vn , if appropriate
[(Vi - Vc) / Vc]3 x 100 Vc may be replaced by Vr or Vn , if appropriate
[(Mi - Mc) / Mc]1 x 100
Mc may be replaced by Mb, if appropriate
[(Mi - Mc) / Mc]2 x 100
Mc may be replaced by Mb, if appropriate
[(Mi - Mc) / Mc]3 x 100
Mc may be replaced by Mb, if appropriate

v1
v2
v3
m1
m2

Range =

]/3

Maximum error - minimum error (%, NCU)

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 13 of 181

Chapter 4, Type Evaluation Performance Tests


4.1 General
This set of performance tests is intended to verify that the measuring system or its constituent
elements operate as intended in a specified environment and under specified conditions. Each
test indicates, where appropriate, the reference conditions for determining the intrinsic error.
Different kinds of tests are specified:
Accuracy tests (including repeatability and flow disturbances tests, if applicable),
Influence factor tests, and
Disturbance tests.
The tests specified in this Recommendation constitute minimum (considered to be sufficient)
test procedures to meet the requirements of R117-1. Further tests may be undertaken, if
necessary, to ensure compliance of the measuring system or its constituent elements with the
requirements of this Recommendation.
When the effect of one influence quantity is being evaluated, all other influence quantities
shall be held relatively constant, at values close to reference conditions.
More recent versions of the specific IEC and ISO standards referenced in this chapters
performance tests may be applied as long as the authority performing the type evaluation (the
testing laboratory) confirms that the more recent versions continue to cover the testing
requirements in this Recommendation.
Tests are ideally carried out on the complete measuring system, fitted with an indicating
device, with all the ancillary devices, and with the correction device, if any. However, the
meter subject to testing is not required to be fitted with its ancillary devices when the latter
are not likely to influence the accuracy of the meter and when these have been verified
separately (for example, an electronic printing device). The measuring device may also be
tested separately provided that the calculator and the indicating device have been verified.
The meter sensor may be tested separately provided that the transducer and the calculator
with indicating device have been verified.
If this measuring device or meter sensor is intended to be connected to a calculator fitted with
a correction device, the applicable correction algorithm(s) provided by the manufacturer shall
be applied on the output signal of the transducer in order to determine its error.
4.2

Uncertainties of measurement

When a test is conducted, the expanded uncertainty of the determination of errors on


indications of volume or mass shall be less than one-fifth of the maximum permissible error
applicable for that test during type evaluation and one-third of the maximum permissible error
applicable for that test during other verifications. The expanded uncertainty is calculated
according to the Guide to the expression of uncertainty in measurement (2008 edition) with

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 14 of 181

k = 2. In the calculation of the uncertainty, the resolution of the EUT shall be taken into
account
If it is technically or economically impractical to reach an uncertainty of 1/5 and 1/3 of the MPE, a
reduced MPE = (6/5 x MPE U) and a reduced MPE = ( 4/3 x MPE U) respectively may be
used. When calculating the expanded uncertainty, the resolution but not the repeatability of the EUT
shall be included.
Note: This exception is only valid in mutual agreement of the manufacturer and the test facility,
and only to approve a device. Use of this exception must be fully documented.

4.3

Reference conditions

Ambient temperature:
Relative humidity:
Atmospheric pressure:
Mains (power supply) voltage:
Mains (power supply) frequency:

15 C to 35 C
25 % to 75 %
84 kPa to 106 kPa
Nominal voltage (Unom)
Nominal frequency (fnom)

During each test, the temperature shall not vary by more than 5 C and the relative humidity
shall not vary by more than 10 % within the reference range.
The test lab shall have the ability to authorize different reference conditions as long as these
conditions are fully documented with an explanation of: why the alternate reference
conditions were used, the implications of the alternate reference conditions, and the effects on
the testing results.

4.4

Test volumes

Some influence quantities have a systematic (absolute) effect on measurement results and not
a proportional effect related to the measured volume. If the fault limit is related to the
measured volume (in order to be able to compare results obtained in different laboratories), it
is necessary to perform a test on a fixed volume and flow rate, and not less than the minimum
measured quantity. Furthermore, the test volume shall be in accordance with the uncertainty
requirements in Section 4.2.
Note: In this section, fault limit is the value that determines when a fault is a
significant fault.
4.5

Preventing the liquid temperature being of influence on test results

Temperature tests concern testing the effect of the ambient temperature on the measurement
result and not the effect of the temperature of the applied liquid. Simulation of the flow signal
while performing the test is advisable in order to prevent the temperature of the liquid being
of influence to the test results. These test methods for evaluation of influence of ambient
temperature are presented in Section 4.8.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 15 of 181

4.6 Software setting / configuration


Software is a critical factor in the proper operation of an electronic meter. Therefore it must
be verified that the software is configured correctly, and that the Type approval certificate
includes any restriction in parameter setting/configuration.
Note: This section needs addition consideration. The concept of this requirement will
need to be repeated in the next revision of R117-1 (Section 6.1.2, etc.) and space for
the software settings/configurations/parameters will included in the R117-3 format
of the test report.
4.7 Reverse flow (from OIML R117-1, Section 2.13.4)
Check if a reversal of the flow results in an error greater than the minimum specified quantity
deviation. If so, the measuring system (in which the liquid could flow in the opposite
direction) shall be provided with a non-return valve. See also flow computers section.
Note 1: See Section 5 for Testing procedures for meter sensors and measuring
devices.
Note 2: See Section 6 for Testing Procedures for electronic calculators (that may be
equipped with a conversion device), indicating devices and associated devices.

4.8 Influence factor tests


4.8.1 General
The general reference for testing requirements in 4.8 is OIML D 11 (Edition 2013).
The test procedures in 4.8 have been given in condensed form, for information only, and are
adapted from the referenced IEC and ISO publications. Before conducting the tests, the
applicable publications should be consulted.
4.8.1.1 For each performance test, typical test conditions are indicated; these conditions
correspond to the climatic and mechanical environmental conditions to which
measuring systems are usually exposed.
4.8.1.2 The applicant for type evaluation shall specify the rated operating conditions and the
specific environmental conditions in the documentation supplied to the authority
performing the type evaluation (the testing laboratory) based on the intended use of
the instrument. Higher severity levels may be requested by the manufacturer. The
authority performing the type evaluation (the testing laboratory) shall conduct
performance tests at the agreed severity levels. If type approval is granted, the data
plate on the EUT shall indicate the corresponding limits of use. Manufacturers shall
inform potential users of the environmental conditions for which the instrument is
approved. The authority performing the type evaluation (the testing laboratory) shall
verify that these environmental conditions are met.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 16 of 181

4.8.2 Test levels for temperature


The thermal conditions in which measuring systems and ancillary devices are used vary
considerably. These do not only highly dependent on the place on earth, ranging from arctic
to tropical regions, but are also considerably dependent on indoor or outdoor applications.
Devices being typically used indoors in one country can be typically used outdoors in other
countries. Therefore, no classes combining low and high temperature limits have been
described in this Recommendation.
Note: While manufacturers select the test levels for type evaluation, national (or
regional) legislation will generally set the requirements for acceptable lower and
upper temperature limits (taking into account the test levels in 4.8.5 and 4.8.6.).

4.8.3 Classification for humidity


The following table gives a classification for the test levels (severity levels) for the humidity
tests:

Class

H1

H2

H3

Test level
Damp heat
(cyclic)

Description
This class applies to instruments or parts of instruments typically
used in temperature-controlled enclosed (weather-protected)
locations. Where necessary, heating, cooling or humidification is
used to maintain the required environmental conditions. Measuring
instruments are not exposed to condensed water, precipitation, or
ice formations.
These conditions may apply in living areas, continuously staffed
offices, certain workshops, and other rooms for special
applications.
This class applies to instruments or parts of instruments typically
used in enclosed (weather-protected) locations where the local
climate is not controlled. Measuring instruments present may be
subject to condensed water, water from sources other than rain,
and to ice formations.
These conditions may apply in some publicly-accessible areas in
buildings, garages, below-ground areas, certain workshops,
factories, industrial plants, ordinary storage rooms for frostresistant products, farm buildings, etc.
This class applies to instruments or parts of instruments used in
open air locations excluding those in extreme climate zones such
as polar and desert environments.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 17 of 181

4.8.4 Classification for mechanical tests


The following table gives a classification for the test levels (severity levels) for mechanical
tests:
Class

Test level
Vibration

M1

M2

M3

Description
This class applies to locations with vibration of low significance
For example, for instruments fastened to light supporting
structures subject to negligible vibrations and shocks
(transmitted from local blasting or pile-driving activities,
slamming doors, etc.)
This class applies to locations with significant or high levels of vibration
and shock
For example, vibration and shock transmitted from machines
and passing vehicles in the vicinity or adjacent to heavy
machines, conveyor belts, etc.
This class applies to locations where the level of vibration is high and/or
very high
For example, for measuring instruments mounted directly on
machines, conveyor belts etc.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 18 of 181

Table 4.8.5 Dry heat


Applicable standards

IEC 60068-2-2 [12], IEC 60068-3-1 [16]

Test method

Exposure to dry heat (non condensing)

Applicability

General
Verification of compliance with the provisions in 4.1.1 under conditions of high
temperature
The test comprises exposure to the specified high temperature under free air
conditions during the period of time specified (the period specified is the period
succeeding the moment at which the EUT has reached temperature stability).
The change in temperature shall not exceed 1 C/min during heating up and
cooling down.
The absolute humidity of the test atmosphere shall not exceed 20 g/m3.
When tests are performed at temperatures below 35 C, the relative humidity shall
not exceed 50 %.
The EUT shall be tested:
*at the reference temperature of 20 C after 1 hour conditioning,
*at the specified high temperature, 2 hours after temperature stabilization,
*after 1 hour recovery of the EUT at the reference temperature of 20 C.
During tests, the EUT shall be in operation. Simulated inputs are permitted. Tests
shall be performed at a minimum of one flow rate
One of the following test levels may be specified:

Object of the test

Test procedure in brief

Test level index

unit

Temperature

30

40

55

70

85

Duration

hours

Permitted maximum
deviation

All functions shall operate as designed.


All errors shall be within the maximum permissible errors.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 19 of 181

Table 4.8.6 Cold


Applicable standards

IEC 60068-2-1 [11], IEC 60068-3-1 [16]

Test method

Exposure to low temperature

Applicability

General
Verification of compliance with the provisions in 4.1.1 under conditions of
low temperature
The test comprises exposure to the specified low temperature under free
air conditions for a 2-hour period after the EUT has reached temperature
stability.
The change of temperature shall not exceed 1 C/min during heating up
and cooling down.
IEC specifies that the power to the EUT shall be switched off before the
temperature is raised.
The EUT shall be tested:
- at the reference temperature of 20 C after 1 hour conditioning,
- at the specified low temperature, 2 hours after temperature stabilization,
- after 1 hour recovery of the EUT at the reference temperature of 20 C.
During tests, the EUT shall be in operation. Simulated inputs are permitted.
Tests shall be performed at a minimum of one flow rate
One of the following test levels may be specified:

Object of the test

Test procedure in brief

Test level index

unit

Temperature

+5

-10

-25

-40

Duration
Permitted maximum
deviation

2
2
2
2
All functions shall operate as designed.
All errors shall be within the maximum permissible errors.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

hours

Page 20 of 181

Table 4.8.7 Damp heat, cyclic (condensing)


Applicable standards

IEC 60068-2-30 [13], IEC 60068-3-4 [17]

Test method

Exposure to damp heat with cyclic temperature variation

Applicability

Applicable only for outdoor used equipment


Verification of compliance with the provisions in 4.1.1 under conditions of high
humidity combined with cyclic temperature changes
The test comprises exposure to cyclic temperature variation between 25 C and
the appropriate upper temperature while maintaining the relative humidity above
95 % during the temperature change and the low temperature phases and at or
above 93 % RH at the upper temperature phases.
Condensation is expected to occur on the EUT during the temperature rise.
The 24-hour cycle comprises:
1) temperature rise during 3 hours,
2) temperature maintained at upper value until 12 hours from the start of the
cycle,
3) temperature lowered to lower temperature level within a period of 3 to 6
hours, the declination (rate of fall) during the first hour and a half being such that
the lower temperature level would be reached in a 3 hours period,
4) temperature maintained at the lower level until the 24 h period is completed.
The stabilizing period before and recovery period after the cyclic exposure shall
be such that the temperature of all parts of the EUT is within 3 C of its final
value.
Special electrical conditions and recovery conditions may need to be specified.
For integrating measuring instrument see sub clause 9.2.2 for the appropriate
sequence of measurements during the test
The stabilizing period before and recovery after the cyclic exposure shall be such
that all parts of the EUT are approximately at their final temperature.
During tests, the EUT shall be in operation. Simulated inputs are permitted. After
the application of the influence factor and recovery the EUT shall be tested at a
minimum of one flow rate.
One of the following test levels may be specified:

Object of the test

Test procedure in brief

Test level index

unit

Upper temperature

40

55

Duration

24-hour cycle

Restrictions
Permitted maximum
deviation

During the application of the influence quantity the power supply of the EUT is in
switch-off mode.
After the application of the influence factor and recovery:
All functions shall operate as designed.
All errors shall be within the maximum permissible errors.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 21 of 181

Table 4.8.8 Vibration (random)


Applicable standard

IEC 60068-2-47 [14], IEC 60068-2-64 [15], (IEC 60068-3-8 [xx])

Test method

Exposure to random vibration

Applicability

General
Verification of compliance with the provisions in 4.1.1 under conditions of
random vibration
The test comprises exposure of the EUT to vibration.
The EUT shall be tested in three, mutually perpendicular axes mounted on a
rigid fixture by its normal mounting means.
The EUT shall normally be mounted in such a way that the gravity vector points
in the same direction as it would in normal use. Where on basis of the
measurement principle the direction the effect can be assumed negligible the
EUT may be mounted in any position.
After the application of the influence factor, the EUT shall be tested at a
minimum of one flow rate.
One of the following test levels may be specified:

Object of the test

Test procedure in brief

Test level index

unit

10 150

10 150

Hz

Total RMS level

1.6

ms-2

ASD level 10-20 Hz

0.05

m2s-3

Total frequency range

ASD level 20-150 Hz


Duration per axis
Restrictions
Permitted maximum
deviation

dB/octave
-3
-3
For each of the orthogonal directions the vibration exposure time shall be 2
minutes.
During the application of the influence quantity the power supply of the EUT is
in switch-off mode.
After the influence factor is removed: all functions shall operate as designed.
All errors shall be within the maximum permissible errors.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 22 of 181

4.9 Disturbance tests


4.9.1

General

The general reference for testing requirements in Sections 4.9 and 4.10 is OIML D 11 (Edition
2013). Test procedures in 4.9 and 4.10 have been given in condensed form, for information only,
and are adapted from the referenced IEC publications. Before conducting the tests, the applicable
publications should be consulted.
4.9.1.1 Severity levels for electrical disturbance tests
The following table gives a classification for electrical disturbance tests:
Class
E1

E2

E3

Description
This class applies to measuring instruments used in locations where electromagnetic
disturbances correspond to those likely to be found in a residential, commercial and/or
light industrial environments.
This class applies to measuring instruments used in locations where electromagnetic
disturbances correspond to those likely to be found in industrial buildings.
This class applies to measuring instruments powered by the battery of a vehicle and
exposed to electromagnetic disturbances which correspond to those likely to be found in
any environment not generally considered hazardous for the general public.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 23 of 181

The relation between the class and the applicable test levels (severity levels) is given in the
following table.
Test Level (Severity Level) for
class

Test

E1

E2

E3

R117-2
Section

--

4.9.2.1

--

--

--

4.9.2.2

--

4.9.3

2
3
2
3

3
3
3
3

-3
---

4.9.4
4.9.5
4.9.6
4.9.7

--

--

4.9.8

-3

1
3

---

4.9.9
4.9.10

4.9.11.1

4.9.11.2

4.9.11.3

--

--

C or F

4.10.1

--

--

IV

4.10.2

--

--

I + III

4.10.3

--

--

I + II

4.10.4

Test Description
AC mains voltage variation
DC mains voltage variation
AC mains power voltage dips, short interruptions,
and voltage variations
Bursts (transients) on AC and DC mains
Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
Bursts (transients) on signal, data and control lines
Surges on signal, data and control lines
DC mains power voltage dips, short interruptions and
voltage variations
Ripple on DC input power ports
Surges on AC and DC mains lines
Radiated radio frequency electromagnetic fields of
general origin
Radiated radio frequency electromagnetic fields
(digital radio telephones)
Conducted (common mode) currents generated by
radio frequency electromagnetic fields
Voltage variations (road vehicle battery)
Electrical transient conduction along supply lines (EUT
powered by road vehicle battery)
Battery voltage variations during starting up a vehicle
engine
Load dump test

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 24 of 181

4.9.1.2

Electronic devices powered by batteries

There is a distinction between the tests for instruments powered by:


(a)
Disposable batteries;
(b)
General rechargeable batteries; and
(c)
Batteries of road vehicles.
For the case of disposable and rechargeable batteries of a general nature, no standards concerning
the response instruments to the battery condition are available.
Devices powered by non-rechargeable batteries or by rechargeable batteries that cannot be
(re)charged during the operation of the measuring system, shall comply with the following
requirements:
(a)
The device provided with new or fully charged batteries of the specified type shall comply
with the applicable metrological requirements;
(b)
As soon as the battery voltage has dropped to a value specified by the manufacturer as the
minimum value of voltage where the device complies with metrological requirements, this shall be
detected and acted upon by the device in accordance with Section 4.2 of R117-1.
For these devices, no special tests for disturbances associated with the "mains" power have to be
carried out.
Devices powered by rechargeable auxiliary batteries that are intended be (re)charged during the
operation of the measuring instrument shall both:
(a) comply with the requirements for devices powered by non-rechargeable batteries or by
rechargeable batteries that cannot be (re)charged during the operation of the measuring system, with
the mains power switched off; and
(b)
on.

comply with the requirements for AC mains powered devices with the mains power switched

Devices powered by mains power and provided with a back-up battery for data-storage only, shall
comply with the requirements for AC mains powered devices.
For electronic devices powered by the on-board battery of a road vehicle, a series of special tests for
disturbances associated with the power supply are given in 4.10.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 25 of 181

Table 4.9.2.1 AC mains voltage variation


Applicable standards

IEC/TR3 61000-2-1 [18], IEC 61000-4-1 [20]

Test method

Applying low and high level AC mains power voltage (single phase)
Only applicable for measuring instruments which are temporarily or
permanently connected to an AC mains power network while in operation
This test is not applicable to equipment powered by a road vehicle battery.
Verification of compliance with the provisions in 4.1.1 under conditions of AC
mains network voltage changes between upper and lower limit
The test comprises exposure of the EUT to the lower and upper limit power
supply condition for a period sufficient for achieving temperature stability and
subsequently performing the required measurements
while the EUT is operating under normal atmospheric conditions.
During tests, the EUT shall be in operation. Simulated inputs are permitted.
Tests shall be performed at a minimum of one flow rate.

Applicability
Object of the test

Test procedure in brief

Test level
Mains
voltage

The following test levels are applicable:


Upper limit

Unom1 + 10 %

Lower limit

Unom2 15 %
The values of Unom are those as specified by the manufacturer and marked on
the measuring instrument. In the case a range is specified Unom1 concerns the
highest and Unom2 concerns the lowest value of that range. If only one nominal
mains voltage value (Unom) is presented then Unom1 = Unom2 = Unom.
In the case of three phase power supply, the voltage variation shall apply for
each phase successively.

Extend
Permitted maximum
deviation

At supply voltage levels between upper and lower limit:


- all functions shall operate as designed.
- all errors shall be within the maximum permissible errors.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 26 of 181

Table 4.9.2.2 DC mains voltage variation


Applicable standard

IEC 60654-2 [19]

Test method

Applying low and high level DC mains power voltage.


Only applicable for measuring instruments which are temporarily or
permanently connected to a DC mains power network while in operation and
generally only applicable in industrial environment. (see sub-clause 8.4.1)
This test is not applicable to equipment powered by a road vehicle battery.
Verification of compliance with the provisions in 4.1.1 under conditions of DC
mains power voltage changes between upper and lower limit.
The test comprises exposure to the specified power supply condition for a
period sufficient for achieving temperature stability and subsequently
performing the required measurements.
The test consists of exposure of the EUT to the specified power supply
conditions while the EUT is operating under normal atmospheric conditions.
During tests, the EUT shall be in operation. Simulated inputs are permitted.
Tests shall be performed at a minimum of one flow rate.
The upper voltage limit is the DC level at which the EUT has been
manufactured to automatically detect high-level conditions.
The lower limit will be the DC level at which the EUT has been manufactured
to automatically detect low-level conditions.
The EUT shall comply with the specified maximum permissible errors at
voltage levels between the two levels. Testing may be restricted to subsequent
exposure to the upper and lower voltage level.
The DC operating range as specified by the manufacturer but not less than

Applicability

Object of the test

Test procedure in brief

Test level

Restrictions

Permitted maximum
deviation

Unom 15 % Unom Unom + 10 %


At supply voltage levels between upper and lower limit:
All functions shall operate as designed.
All errors shall be within the maximum permissible errors.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 27 of 181

Table 4.9.3 AC mains voltage dips, short interruptions and reductions


Applicable standards
Test method

Applicability

Object of the test

Test procedure in brief

IEC 61000-4-11 [26], IEC 61000-6-1 [29], IEC 61000-6-2 [30]


Introducing short-time reductions of mains voltage using the test set-up defined in
the applicable standard
Only applicable for measuring instruments with rated input current of less than 16
A per phase which are temporarily or permanently connected to an AC mains
power network while in operation
This test is only applicable to equipment powered by AC mains supply and is not
applicable to equipment powered by a road vehicle battery.
Verification of compliance with the provisions in 4.1.1 under conditions of short
time mains voltage reductions
A test generator is to be used which is suitable to reduce the amplitude of the AC
mains voltage for the required period of time.
The performance of the test generator shall be verified before connecting the
EUT.
The mains voltage reduction tests shall be repeated 10 times with intervals of at
least 10 s between the tests.
The tests shall be applied continuously during the measurement time.
The interruptions and reductions are repeated throughout the time necessary to
perform the whole test; for this reason, more than ten interruptions and reductions
may be necessary.
During tests, the EUT shall be in operation. Simulated inputs are permitted. Tests
shall be performed at a minimum of one flow rate
One of the following test levels may be specified:

Test level index


Test a
Test b
Voltage dips

Test c
Test d
Test e

Permitted maximum
deviation

unit

0.5

0.5

cycles

Reduction to

Duration

cycles

Reduction to

70

40

25/30

10/12

cycles

Reduction to

n/a

70

Duration

n/a

25/30

cycles

Reduction to

n/a

80

Reduction to
Duration

Duration

Duration
n/a
250/300
cycles
a) for interruptible measuring systems: either significant faults do not occur or
checking facilities detect a malfunctioning and act upon in it accordance with
4.3 when significant faults occur.
b) for non-interruptible measuring systems: no significant faults occur.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 28 of 181

Table 4.9.4 Bursts (transients) on AC and DC mains


Applicable standards

IEC 61000-4-4 [23]

Test method

Introducing transients on the mains power lines


Only applicable for electronic measuring instruments which are temporarily or
permanently connected to a mains power network while in operation
This test is not applicable to instruments connected to road vehicle batteries; see
A.12 for specific testing requirements on these instruments.
Verification of compliance with the provisions in 4.1.1 during conditions where
electrical bursts are superimposed on the mains voltage
A burst generator as defined in the referred standard shall be used.

Applicability

Object of the test

Test procedure in brief

The characteristics of the generator shall be verified before connecting the EUT.
The test comprises exposure to bursts of voltage spikes for which the output
voltage on 50 and 1000 load are defined in the referred standard.
Both positive and negative polarity of the bursts shall be applied.
The duration of the test shall not be less than 1 min for each amplitude and
polarity. The injection network on the mains shall contain blocking filters to
prevent the burst energy being dissipated in the mains.
At least 10 positive and negative randomly phased bursts shall be applied.
The bursts are applied during all the time necessary to perform the test;
therefore, more bursts than indicated above may be necessary.
During tests, the EUT shall be in operation. Simulated inputs are permitted.
Tests shall be performed at a minimum of one flow rate.
One of the following test levels may be specified:

Test level index

unit

Amplitude (peak value)

kV

Repetition rate

5
5
kHz
for interruptible measuring systems: either significant faults do not occur or
checking facilities detect a malfunctioning and act upon in it accordance
with 4.3 when significant faults occur.
b) for non-interruptible measuring systems: no significant faults occur.
a)

Permitted maximum
deviation

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 29 of 181

Table 4.9.5 Electrostatic discharge


Applicable standard

IEC 61000-4-2 [21]

Test method

Exposure to electrostatic discharge (ESD)

Applicability

Applicable to all electronic measuring instruments


Verification of compliance with the provisions in 4.1.1 in case of direct
exposure to electrostatic discharges or such discharges in the neighbourhood
of the EUT.
The test comprises exposure of the EUT to electrical discharges.
An ESD generator as defined in the referred standard shall be used and the
test set-up shall comply with the dimensions, materials used and conditions
as specified in the referred standard. Before starting the tests, the
performance of the generator shall be verified.
At least 10 discharges per preselected discharge location shall be applied.
For EUT not equipped with a ground terminal, the EUT shall be fully
discharged between discharges.
The time interval between successive discharges shall be at least 1 second.
Contact discharge is the preferred test method. Air discharge is far less
defined and reproducible and therefore shall be used only where contact
discharge cannot be applied.
Direct application:
In the contact discharge mode to be carried out on conductive surfaces, the
electrode shall be in contact with the EUT before activation of the discharge.
In such case the discharge spark occurs in the vacuum relays of the contact
discharge tip.
On insulated surfaces only the air discharge mode can be applied. The EUT
is approached by the charged electrode until a spark discharge occurs
During tests, the EUT shall be in operation. Simulated inputs are permitted.
Tests shall be performed at a minimum of one flow rate

Object of the test

Test procedure in brief

Test level index

unit

Contact discharge

kV

Air discharge

kV

Test voltage
a)
Permitted maximum
deviation

for interruptible measuring systems: either significant faults do not occur


or checking facilities detect a malfunctioning and act upon in it
accordance with 4.3 when significant faults occur
b) for non-interruptible measuring systems: no significant faults occur.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 30 of 181

Table 4.9.6 Bursts (transients) on signal, data and control lines


Applicable standards

IEC 61000-4-4 [23]

Test method

Introducing transients on signal, data and control lines


Only applicable for electronic measuring instruments containing active
electronic circuits which during operation are permanently or temporarily
connected to external electrical signal, data and/or control lines.
This test is not applicable to equipment powered by a road vehicle battery.
Verification of compliance with the provisions in 4.1.1during conditions
where electrical bursts are superimposed on I/O and communication ports
A burst generator as defined in the referred standard shall be used The
characteristics of the generator shall be verified before connecting the EUT.
The test comprises exposure to bursts of voltage spikes for which the output
voltage on 50 W and 1000 W load are defined in the referred standard.
Both positive and negative polarity of the bursts shall be applied.
The duration of the test shall not be less than 1 min for each amplitude and
polarity.
A capacitive coupling clamp as defined in the standard shall be used for the
coupling of the bursts into the I/O and communication lines,
The bursts are applied during all the time necessary to perform the test; for
that purpose more bursts than indicated above may be necessary.
During tests, the EUT shall be in operation. Simulated inputs are permitted.
Tests shall be performed at a minimum of one flow rate
One of the following test levels may be specified:

Applicability

Object of the test

Test procedure in brief

Test level index


Amplitude (peak value)
Repetition rate
Restrictions

Permitted maximum
deviation

unit

0.5

kV

5
5
kHz
Tests on signal lines are applicable only for I/O signal, data and control
ports, with a cable length exceeding 3 m (as specified by the manufacturer).
a) for interruptible measuring systems: either significant faults do not occur
or checking facilities detect a malfunctioning and act upon in it
accordance with 4.3 when significant faults occur.
b) for non-interruptible measuring systems: no significant faults occur.
In either a) or b) above, human intervention is permitted to put the EUT into
operation after the test (e.g. replacing a fuse), provided that all relevant data
is available after the human intervention.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 31 of 181

Table 4.9.7 Surges on signal, data and control lines


Applicable standard

IEC 61000-4-5 [24]

Test method

Introducing electrical surges on signal, data and control lines


Only applicable for electronic measuring instruments containing active electronic
circuits which during operation are temporarily or permanently connected to electrical
signal, data and/or control lines that may exceed a length of 10 m.
This test is not applicable to equipment powered by a road vehicle battery.
Verification of compliance with the provisions in 4.1.1during conditions where
electrical surges are superimposed on I/O and communication ports
A surge generator as defined in the referred standard shall be used. The characteristics
of the generator shall be verified before connecting the EUT.
The test comprises exposure to electrical surges for which the rise time, pulse width,
peak values of the output voltage/current on high/low impedance load and the
minimum time interval between two successive pulses are defined in the referred
standard.
At least 3 positive and 3 negative surges shall be applied. The applicable injection
network depends on the kind of wiring the surge is coupled into and is defined in the
referred standard.
The surges are applied during all the time necessary to perform the test; to that
purpose more surges than indicated above may be necessary.
During tests, the EUT shall be in operation. Simulated inputs are permitted. Tests
shall be performed at a minimum of one flow rate.
One of the following test levels may be specified:

Applicability

Object of the test

Test procedure in brief

Test level index (Installation class)


Unsymmetrical lines

unit

Line to line

1.0

kV

Line(s) to ground

2.0

kV

2.0

kV

2.0

kV

Symmetrical lines
Shielded I/O and
communication lines

Restrictions

Permitted maximum
deviation

Line(s) to ground

1. Test on signal lines apply only for I/O, signal, data and control ports, with a cable
length exceeding 30 m (as specified by the manufacturer).
2. Indoor DC signal, data, and control cables (regardless of length) are exempt from
this test.
a) for interruptible measuring systems: either significant faults do not occur or
checking facilities detect a malfunctioning and act upon in it accordance with 4.3
when significant faults occur.
b) for non-interruptible measuring systems: no significant faults occur.
In either a) or b) above, human intervention is permitted to put the EUT into
operation after the test (e.g. replacing a fuse), provided that all relevant data is
available after the human intervention.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 32 of 181

Table 4.9.8 DC mains voltage dips, short interruptions and (short term) variations
Applicable standard
Test method

Applicability

Object of the test

Test procedure in brief

IEC 61000-4-29 [28]; IEC 61000-4-1


Introducing voltage dips, short interruptions and voltage variations on DC mains
power lines using the test set-up defined in the applicable standard
Only applicable for measuring instruments which are temporarily or permanently
connected to a DC mains power network while in operation.
This test is only applicable to equipment powered by DC mains supply and is not
applicable to equipment powered by a road vehicle battery.
Verification of compliance with the provisions in 4.1.1under conditions of voltage
dips, voltage variations and short interruptions on DC mains.
A test generator as defined in the referred standard shall be used. Before starting the
tests, the performance of the generator shall be verified.
The EUT shall be exposed to voltage dips, short interruptions, for each of the
selected combinations of amplitude and duration, using a sequence of three
dips/interruptions and intervals of at least 10 s between each test event.
The most representative operating modes of the EUT shall be tested three times at
10 s intervals for each of the specified voltage variations
If the EUT is an integrating instrument, the test pulses shall be continuously applied
during the measurement time.
The disturbances are applied during all the time necessary to perform the test; to
that purpose more disturbances than indicated above may be necessary.
During tests, the EUT shall be in operation. Simulated inputs are permitted. Tests
shall be performed at a minimum of one flow rate.
unit

Voltage dips

Amplitude

40 and 70

% of the rated voltage

0.01; 0.03; 0.1; 0.3; 1; t

Short
interruptions

Duration
Test
condition
Amplitude
Duration

Voltage
variations

Amplitude
Duration

Restrictions

Permitted maximum
deviation

High impedance and/or low impedance


0

% of the rated voltage

0.001; 0.003; 0.01; 0.03; 0.1; 0.3; 1; t

85 and 120

% of the rated voltage

0.1; 0.3; 1; 3; 10; t


s
If the EUT is tested for short interruptions, it is unnecessary to test for other levels
of the same duration, unless the immunity of the equipment is detrimentally affected
by voltage dips of less than 70 % of the rated voltage.
a) for interruptible measuring systems: either significant faults do not occur or
checking facilities detect a malfunctioning and act upon in it accordance with
4.3 when significant faults occur.
b) for non-interruptible measuring systems: no significant faults occur.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 33 of 181

Table 4.9.9 Ripple on DC mains power


Applicable standard

IEC 61000-4-17 [27] and IEC 6100-4-1

Test method

Introducing a ripple voltage on the DC input power port.


Only applicable for measuring instruments which are temporarily or permanently
connected to a DC mains power network (distribution system) supplied by
external rectifier systems while in operation and generally only applicable in
industrial environment. (see sub-clause 8.4.1)
This test is only applicable to equipment powered by DC mains supply and is not
applicable to equipment powered by a road vehicle battery.
Verification of compliance with the provisions in 4.1.1under conditions of the
introduction of a ripple on the DC mains voltage. This test is not applicable for
instruments connected to battery charger systems with incorporated switch mode
converters.
A test generator as defined in the referred standard shall be used. Before starting
the tests, the performance of the generator shall be verified.
The test comprises subjecting the EUT to ripple voltages such as those generated
by traditional rectifier systems and/or auxiliary service battery chargers overlaying
on DC power supply sources.
The frequency of the ripple voltage is the applicable power frequency or a
multiple (2, 3 or 6) dependant on the rectifier system used for the mains.
The waveform of the ripple, at the output of the test generator, has a sinusoidlinear character.
The test shall be applied for at least 10 min or for the period time necessary to
allow a complete verification of the EUTs operating performance.
The frequency of the ripple is the power frequency or its multiple 2, 3 or 6, as
specified in the product specification.
During tests, the EUT shall be in operation. Simulated inputs are permitted. Tests
shall be performed at a minimum of one flow rate.

Applicability

Object of the test

Test procedure in brief

Percentage of the nominal


DC voltage
Restrictions
Permitted maximum
deviation

The test level is a peak-to-peak voltage expressed as a percentage of the nominal


DC voltage, UDC.
a) for interruptible measuring systems: either significant faults do not occur or
checking facilities detect a malfunctioning and act upon in it accordance with
4.3 when significant faults occur.
b) for non-interruptible measuring systems: no significant faults occur.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 34 of 181

Table 4.9.10 Surges on AC and DC mains power lines


Applicable standard

IEC 61000-4-5 [24]

Test method

Introducing electrical surges on the mains power lines


Only applicable for electronic measuring instruments which are temporarily or
permanently connected to a mains power network while in operation
Verification of compliance with the provisions in 4.1.1during conditions where
electrical surges are superimposed on the mains voltage
A surge generator as defined in the referred standard shall be used The
characteristics of the generator shall be verified before connecting the EUT.
The test comprises exposure to electrical surges for which the rise time, pulse
width, peak values of the output voltage/current on high/low impedance load
and the minimum time interval between two successive pulses are defined in
the referred standard.
At least 3 positive and 3 negative surges shall be applied.
On AC mains supply lines the surges shall be synchronised with AC supply
frequency and shall be repeated such that injection of surges on all the 4 phase
shifts: 0, 90, 180 and 270 with the mains frequency is covered.
The injection network circuit depends on the applicable conductor and is
defined in the referred standard.
The surges are applied during all the time necessary to perform the test; to that
purpose more surges than indicated above may be necessary.
During tests, the EUT shall be in operation. Simulated inputs are permitted.
Tests shall be performed at a minimum of one flow rate
Parameter
mode
value
unit

Applicability
Object of the test

Test procedure in brief

Test level specifications:

Surge voltage
peak
Restrictions

Permitted maximum
deviation

Line to line:

1.0

kV

Line to earth:

2.0

kV

This test does not apply to devices powered by a road vehicle battery;
a) for interruptible measuring systems: either significant faults do not occur
or checking facilities detect a malfunctioning and act upon in it accordance
with 4.3 when significant faults occur.
b) for non-interruptible measuring systems: no significant faults occur.
In either a) or b) above, human intervention is permitted to put the EUT into
operation after the test (e.g. replacing a fuse), provided that all relevant data is
available after the human intervention.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 35 of 181

Table 4.9.11 Radiated RF electromagnetic fields


Applicable standard

IEC 61000-4-3 [22]; IEC 61000-4-20 [yy]

Test method

Exposure to radiated radio frequency electromagnetic fields


Only applicable for electronic measuring instruments containing active electronic
circuits
Verification of compliance with the provisions in 4.1.1under conditions of
exposure to electromagnetic fields
The EUT is exposed to electromagnetic fields with the required field strength and
the field uniformity like defined in the referred standard.
The level of field strength specified refers to the field generated by the
unmodulated carrier wave.
The EUT shall be exposed to the modulated wave field. The frequency sweep
shall be made only pausing to adjust the RF signal level or to switch RFgenerators, amplifiers and antennas if necessary. Where the frequency range is
swept incrementally, the step size shall not exceed 1 % of the preceding frequency
value.
The dwell time of the amplitude modulated carrier at each frequency shall not be
less than the time necessary for the EUT to be exercised and to respond, but shall
in no case be less than 0.5 s.
Adequate EM fields can be generated in facilities of different type and set-up the
use of which is limited by the dimensions of the EUT and the frequency range of
the facility.
The expected most critical frequencies (e.g. clock frequencies) shall be analyzed
separately.
During tests, the EUT shall be in operation. Simulated inputs are permitted. Tests
shall be performed at a minimum of one flow rate
Test levels may be specified according to Tables 4.9.11.1 and 4.9.11.2

Applicability
Object of the test

Test procedure in brief

Test levels

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 36 of 181

Table 4.9.11.1 Electromagnetic fields of general origin


Test level index
Frequency Range
Modulation
Permitted maximum
deviation

(26) 80 - 1000 MHz

unit

10

V/m

80 % AM, 1 kHz, sine wave


a) for interruptible measuring systems: either significant faults do not occur or
checking facilities detect a malfunctioning and act upon in it accordance with
4.3 when significant faults occur,
b) for non-interruptible measuring systems: no significant faults occur.

Table 4.9.11.2 Electromagnetic fields specifically caused by wireless communication networks


Test level index

3
446 MHz

Frequency Range

(1)

(0.8 3) GHz (2),(3)

Modulation

unit

10
V/m
10
80 % AM, 1 kHz, sine wave

1)
2)

3)

Applicable only for the Europe region


The main test level selection criteria should be the consequences of failure
of an instrument located at the expected minimum distance from a radiating
source for wireless communication. (see sub-clause 8.4.10 and Annex G of
IEC 61000-4-3) and the possibility of fraud by using such radiating source
(like a mobile phone or a transceiver). Selection of the level indexed 3 is
suggested to apply only when the manufacturer of the measuring instrument
specifies a minimum distance allowed between licensed communication
transmitters and the measuring instrument. In all other cases the level
indexed 4 is to be applied.
It is not intended that tests need to be applied continuously over the entire
frequency range of (1 6) GHz and may be reduced to cover just the
specific frequency bands nationally allocated for RF emitting sources. (see
IEC /TR 61000-2-5 [26]. Reduction of the test to cover the frequency range
(1.4 3) GHz is expected to cover all wide beam and omni-directional
emitting sources

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 37 of 181

Table 4.9.11.3 Conducted (common mode) currents generated by RF EM fields


Applicable standard

IEC 61000-4-6 [25]

Test method

Injection of RF currents representing exposure to RF electromagnetic fields


Only applicable for electronic measuring instruments containing active electronic
circuits and equipped with external electrical wiring (mains power, signal, data
and control lines)
Verification of compliance with the provisions in 4.1.1while exposed to
electromagnetic fields
A RF EM current, simulating the influence of EM fields shall be coupled or
injected into the power ports and I/O ports of the EUT using coupling/decoupling
devices as defined in the referred standard.
The characteristics of the test equipment consisting of an RF generator,
(de-)coupling devices, attenuators, etc. shall be verified before connecting the
EUT.
During tests, the EUT shall be in operation. Simulated inputs are permitted. Tests
shall be performed at a minimum of one flow rate
One of the following test levels may be specified:

Applicability
Object of the test

Test procedure in brief

Test level index

unit

RF amplitude

10

V (e.m.f.)

0.15 80

Frequency range
Modulation

MHz

80 % AM, 1 kHz sine wave


for interruptible measuring systems: either significant faults do not occur or
checking facilities detect a malfunctioning and act upon in it accordance with
4.3 when significant faults occur,
b) for non-interruptible measuring systems: no significant faults occur.
a)

Permitted maximum
deviation

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 38 of 181

4.10 Tests for EUTs powered by a road vehicle battery


Table 4.10.1 Voltage variations
Applicable standard

ISO 16750-2 [aa]

Test method

Variation in supply voltage


Applicable to all measuring instruments supplied by the internal battery of a vehicle and
charged by use of a combustion engine driven generator
Verification of compliance with the provisions in 4.1 under conditions of high voltage (for
example while charging) and low battery voltage
The test comprises exposure to the specified maximum and minimum power supply voltage
conditions for a period of time necessary for the EUT to be exercised and respond. The test
durations shall be a minimum of one minute.

Applicability
Object of the test

Test procedure in brief

Nominal battery voltage

During tests, the EUT shall be in operation. Simulated inputs are permitted. Tests shall be
performed at a minimum of one flow rate.
One of the following test levels may be specified:
units
Unom = 12 V
Unom = 24 V

Test level index

Lower limit

10.5

10

16

22

18

32

Upper limit
Notes

Permitted maximum
deviation

16
16
16
32
32
16
32
1) In ISO 16750-2 [41] test levels are called Code
2) The recommended test level for these tests are:
Code C for 12 V batteries and Code F for 24 V batteries.
At both the upper supply voltage level and the lower supply voltage level:
- all functions shall operate as designed.
all errors shall be within the maximum permissible errors.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 39 of 181

Table 4.10.2 Electrical transient conduction along supply lines (EUT powered by vehicle battery)
Applicable standard

ISO 76372 [bb]

Test method

Electrical transient conduction along supply lines.


Applicable to all measuring instruments while in operation are supplied by the
internal battery of a vehicle which may at the same time be charged by use of a
combustion engine driven generator.
Verification of compliance with the provisions in 4.1.1under the following
conditions (4):
- transients due to a sudden interruption of currents in a device connected in
parallel with the device under test due to the inductance of the wiring harness
(pulse 2a);
- transients from DC motors acting as generators after the ignition is switched
off (pulse 2b)(5);
- transients on the supply lines which occur as a result of the switching
processes (pulses 3a and 3b).
The test comprises exposure to disturbances on the power voltage by direct
coupling into the supply lines.
One of the following test levels may be specified (IV is recommended):

Applicability

Object of the test

Test procedure in brief

Unom = 12 V

Unom = 24 V

Unom = 12 V

Unom = 24 V

Min.
number of
pulses or
test time

2a

+37 V

+37 V

+ 50 V

+ 50 V

500 pulses

2b

+10 V

+20 V

+10 V

+20 V

10 pulses

3a

-112 V

-150 V

- 150 V

- 200 V

1h

3b

+75 V
+150 V
1h
+ 100 V
+ 200 V
Test pulse 2b is only applicable when the EUT is connected to the battery
via the main switch of the vehicle.
So, if the manufacturer of the EUT has not specified that the EUT is
connected directly to the battery, test pulse 2b is not applicable.

Test level index


Test pulse

III

IV

Pulse voltage Us

Pulse voltage Us

The recommended values in bold, for the level indexed IV, concern the
maximum levels as defined in ISO 7637-2 (2004). The values in
parentheses are the maximum levels as defined in ISO 7637-2 (2011).
(These different test levels are still being debated by the EMC community
responsible for ISO 7637-2 for this reason it is recommended to use the
the levels outside the parenthese for the immediate future,

Notes

Test pulses, minimum of 500 for 2a


a)
Permitted maximum
deviation

for interruptible measuring systems: either significant faults do not occur


or checking facilities detect a malfunctioning and act upon in it
accordance with 4.3 when significant faults occur.
b) for non-interruptible measuring systems: no significant faults occur.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 40 of 181

Table 4.10.3 Battery voltage variations during starting up a vehicle engine


Applicable standard

ISO 16750-2 [aa]

Test method

Supply voltage variation due to energizing the starter motor of a vehicle


Measuring instruments powered by on board DC battery and may be in operation while
the vehicle engine is started
Verification of compliance with the provisions in 4.1.1under conditions of starting the
vehicle engine (during and after cranking)
The test comprises exposure to a typical supply voltage characteristic simulating the
voltage variation while cranking the engine using a DC electrical starter motor
The following test levels may be specified:

Applicability
Object of the test
Test procedure in brief
Nominal battery voltage

Unom = 12 V

Unom = 24 V

Unit

Test profile

II

III

IV

II

III

US

4.5

10

UA

9.5

6.5

6.5

20

15

10

t8

10

10

10

40

100

100

100

40

100

40

ms

tf
1)

Notes

As specified in ISO 16750-2.

Restrictions
Permitted maximum
deviation

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 41 of 181

Table 4.10.4 Load dump test


Applicable standard

ISO 16750-2 [aa]

Test method

Supply voltage variation due to disconnecting a discharged battery


Measuring instruments powered by on board DC battery and may be in
operation while the vehicle engine is running
Verification of compliance with the provisions in 4.1.1under conditions of
disconnecting a discharged vehicle battery while the charging alternator is
running
The test comprises exposure to a typical pulse on the supply voltage, simulating
the voltage peak due to the impedance of connected loads when disconnecting
the battery.
Unom = 12 V
Unom = 24 V
Unit
I
II
I
II

Applicability
Object of the test

Test procedure in brief


Nominal battery voltage
Test pulse shape
US

80

100

150

200

Ri

0.5

tr

10

10

10

10

ms

40-400

40-400

100-350

100-350

ms

td
1)

Notes

As specified in ISO 16750-2

Restrictions
Permitted maximum
deviation

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 42 of 181

Testing procedures for meter sensors and measuring devices

5.1

General information

The meter sensor/measuring device may be tested in either a test bench or in a measuring
system. It shall be installed according to manufacturer specification (meter position(s), straight
pipes, flow straightening device, minimum back pressure, software setting/configuration, warm up
time, etc). Low-flow cut-off (if applicable) is set at minimum value.
[Note: see R117-1 Section 3.1.5.4 on turbine meters and other meter types concerning zero-offset.]
Metrological stability shall be achieved before any testing is started. This means that the
system shall operate within the repeatability error of Section 3.1.2.2 of R117-1. (See Annex X.5.1
for advice on this.)
Before conducting tests, it is necessary to evaluate the meter sensor/measuring device by
using the general check-list given in R117-3 (to be developed) and the relevant points of the checklist given in Annex X.14 (cross reference table to type approval of specific components).
Note: Specific components allowed to receive type approval are only those for which partial
MPEs and/or requirements for acceptance (pass/fail criteria) have been defined.
In accordance with the requirements of Section 6 of OIML R 117-1, tests should be carried
out at the limits of the rated operating conditions the limits of pressure, temperature, density, and
viscosity. It is possible to reduce the number of liquids to be tested if it can be shown, through
technical analysis of the metering principals, that all requirements are fulfilled for any other liquid.
Definition of Meter model: Different sizes of meter sensors/measuring transducers having family
similarities in the principle of operation, construction and materials. A size is defined by the
nominal size of the measuring element of the meter sensor, not the size of the pipe connection.
Meter selection family of meters
When selecting which sizes of a family of meters to be tested, the following rules shall be
considered:
The approving authority shall declare the reasons for including and omitting particular meter
sizes from testing;
Meters which have the most extreme operating parameters within a family, shall be
considered for testing (e.g. the largest flowrate range, the highest peripheral (tip) speed of
moving parts, etc);
Endurance tests shall be applied to meters where the highest wear is expected;
All performance tests relating to influence quantities and disturbances shall be carried out on
one size from a family of electronic meters;
One way of selecting sizes to test is to use Fig. 5.1. Each line represents one family, meter 1 being
the smallest. The family members underlined in Fig. 5.1 are then selected for testing. The sizes not
tested shall be within the range of 0.5 x Qmax Qmax 2 x Qmax of the adjacent sizes.
1
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 43 of 181

1
1
1
1
1

2
2

2
2

3
3

3
3

4
4

5
5

Fig. 5.1, Families of Meters Pyramid


Depending on sensor size, the tests to be carried out are as follows (the selection of sizes to be tested
shall be justified and explained in the test report):

Section Type of test

Selection of meter size to be tested

5.3.1

Reading at
zero flowrate

Section 5.3.1 only applies for electro-magnetic, ultrasonic, and


massflow meters. For those meter types, a selection of meter sizes
according to Fig 5.1.

5.3.2

Accuracy at
metering
conditions

A selection of meter sizes according to Fig 5.1

5.3.3

Accuracy at
limits of the
working range

If documentary evidence is given that technological similarities exist


between sizes, testing is conducted on a reduced number of sizes.
See the chart in Annex X, Section X.5.4.3

5.3.4

Flow
disturbance
(optional)

Only for meters sensitive to flow profile.


This test is not applicable if the verification is performed at its final
installation (stated in the type approval certificate).
If documentary evidence is given that technological similarities exist
between sizes testing is conducted on a reduced number of sizes.

5.3.5

Inclination
test, etc

Only for drum meters. All sizes.

5.4

Endurance test

Only for meters with moving parts/parts under mechanical stress.


Only for those sizes of a model for which the highest wear is expected.
[Note: The durability requirement is met without this endurance test
(for meters not actually tested under 5.5 because the meter will be
running for more than 100 hours during all of the other tests.]
Note: This is a SIGNIFICANT change from the endurance
requirements of R117-1. When R117-2 is approved, R117-1 will
need to reflect this change in a future revision.

5.5

mmq

A selection of meter sizes according to Fig 5.1 (not applicable for


pipeline meters).

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 44 of 181

5.6

Climate and
disturbance
tests

One size only in a family

Temporary Convenor Note 1: The project group spent a very significant amount of
developing, discussing, editing, and arguing about the Table showing whether different
meter technologies are affected by various operating conditions. The latest version of this
table is found (in lineout form) in Annex X.5.4. The participants at the Teddington meeting
(Oct 2013) decided that it was best to not include the table in the 2CD because consensus on
its contents could not be reached. The convener continues to believe that the table would
have value if consensus could be reached so, it has been left (in lineout form) to
encourage Project Group members to comment on whether the table should be included and
the tables suggested practices.
5.2

Test equipment

To determine the amount of liquid passed through the meter sensor/measuring transducer, a
standard test measure (OIML R120), weighing machine, pipe prover (OIML R119) or master meter
can be used. Standards, instruments and methods used shall suit the purpose, be traceable to
international standards or to national standards traceable to international standards and be part of a
reliable calibration program. Any test methods and test volume may be used provided that it is
described in the test report and is accompanied by an uncertainty statement/reference to
accreditation, demonstrating that the expanded uncertainty is in accordance with Section 4.2.
The volume of the supply tank shall be of sufficient capacity to not cause foaming of the
liquid or a rise in temperature during the tests.
Note: It is preferable that all gas elimination devices should be vented back to the supply
tank to avoid changing the test liquid specifications.
The temperature and pressure of the liquid passing through the meter sensor,
measuring device or meter shall be measured close to the meter sensor/measuring device.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 45 of 181

5.3

Accuracy

5.3.1

Indication at zero flowrate

Test for reading at zero flowrate should not exceed line C at minimum flow rate (R117-1 Section
3.1.5.4).
Note: Section 5.3.1 only applies for electro-magnetic, ultrasonic, vortex, and massflow
meters. For those meter types, apply selection of meter sizes according to Fig 5.1.
5.3.2. Accuracy at metering conditions
5.3.2.1 Accuracy at metering conditions (this section is not applicable to drum meters for alcohol,
these meters are covered in 5.3.2.2)
Object of the test
The objective of this test is to verify that all individual measurement results at each flowrate
meet the requirements concerning the maximum permissible errors.
General information
The flow rates of the measuring point are defined by:
Q K nF 1 Qmax
Where nF is a sequence number of the flow rate test, and
1
NF 1

Qmin
Qmax
Where NF is the number of flowrates as in the following table
K

Qmax / Qmin ratio


<5
5-9
10 12
13 21
22 35
>35

NF
3
5
6
7
8
9

Note 1: for turn-down ratios that are not a whole number, the ratio shall be rounded to the
nearest whole number.
Note 2: When testing for an expanded flow range, new test points are added outside the old
flow range, without need to recalculate the old test points.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 46 of 181

When Qmax/Qmin = 10, this gives:


Q(1) = 1,00 x Qmax
Q(2) = 0,63 x Qmax
Q(3) = 0,40 x Qmax
Q(4) = 0,25 x Qmax
Q(5) = 0,16 x Qmax
Q(6) = 0,10 x Qmax

(0.80 x Qmax < Q(1) < 1,00 x Qmax)


(0,56 x Qmax < Q(2) < 0,70 x Qmax)
(0,36 x Qmax < Q(3) < 0,44 x Qmax)
(0,22 x Qmax < Q(4) < 0,28 x Qmax)
(0,14 x Qmax < Q(5) < 0,18 x Qmax)
(0,10 x Qmax < Q(6) < 0,11 x Qmax)

The above table shows that the set rate of flow through the measurement transducer shall not
differ by more than 10% from the calculated flow rate (except at Q(1) where 20% is allowed),
furthermore the limits for the measurement transducer specified by Qmax and Qmin shall not be
exceeded.
Three independent and identical tests shall be carried out at each flow rate. The result
(absolute value) of each of these three tests must not exceed line B of Table 2 of OIML R117-1.
The difference between the largest and the smallest results of the three successive
measurements (range) is a measure of the repeatability error and shall, according to section 3.1.2.2
and A.6.1of the International Recommendation R 117-1, not be greater than 2/5 of Line A in Table
2, for amounts greater than 5 times the minimum measured quantity.
If the measurement transducer is intended to be used together with a mechanical
calculator/indicating device tests shall be performed at two unit prices which correspond to the
maximum and minimum torques. This is generally near the maximum and minimum unit prices.
1
2

Fill in test report __________ (R117-3).


Draw an error-curve with vi as a function of Q for each liquid and each unit price
(optional)

5.3.2.2 Accuracy at metering conditions for drum meters for alcohol


For drum meters for alcohol, this test is performed without the sampling device, if
applicable.
Meters are tested at the following flow rates, 3 tests at each flowrate:
Table x
Flowrate (dm3/min)

Drum meter
Q1

Q2

Q3

MPE (%)

0,2

0,25

0,3

small size (4 L per revolution)

0,5 to 1

1 to 2

2 to 3

big size (20 L per revolution)

3 to 5

5 to 10

10 to 15

MPE of reserve device (reserve drum) of big size drum meter is 0.6 % at all flowrates.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 47 of 181

5.3.3.1 Accuracy at limits of temperature, pressure, viscosity and density


Perform tests according to 5.3.2 at limits of temperature, pressure, viscosity and density (when
relevant, see OIML R117-1 B.A.6.2), at 3 flow rates, or when it is technically justified the flowrate
can also be simulated and see what the worst case effect is.
Note: the 3 suggested flow rates are:
Qmin;
((Qmax Qmin) * 0.25) + Qmin; and
Qmax.
State in the pattern approval certificate if the meter can be verified in one liquid and used in another
etc (OIML R117-1 2.6.3).
5.3.3.2 Converted indication within a coriolis meter
When a coriolis meter uses its density measurement to calculate the liquid quantity in units of
volume or if the density measurement is used by a flow computer as conversion, additional testing is
required in addition to 5.3.2.1.
5.3.3.2.1.
When a coriolis meter uses its density measurement to calculate the liquid quantity in units of
volume, next to an indication of mass, the error of the volume indication must also be determined.
The accuracy in volume is determined according to 5.3.2.1. with an MPE of line C of table 2 of the
R117-1 or half of the specified quantity deviation (Emin). In this case there are no additional
requirements to the density.
Note: As an example: with an accuracy class of 0.3, the MPE on mass is 0.2 and the MPE on
volume is 0.1 in respect to the mass error.
5.3.3.2.2.
When in addition to 5.3.3.2.1, the density measurement is used by a flow computer as conversion,
the initial intrinsic error of the density indication must also be determined. This is done at a
minimum, medium and maximum density against a reference density with the MPE as stated in table
4.2 of R117-1.
5.3.4 Flow disturbances (OIML R117-1 Sections 3.1.5.2, 3.1.6.1, 3.1.7.1, 3.1.8.1, 3.1.9.1)
This test is only to be completed with all manufacturers installation requirements followed as
described in Section 3.1.5.2 of R117-1. If appropriate, meters may be tested with at least one flow
disturbance, at minimum and maximum flow rate. Three independent and identical tests shall be
carried out at both flow rates. The Ev of each test must not exceed line A in Table 2 of OIML R1171, without adjustment.
Alt 1. Use a half-moon plate in two orientations, 90 rotated, upstream the meter. The plate
blocks 0,125 x D of the diameter (see OIML R49-2:2006 and ISO 4064-3:2005).
Alt 2 Use a ball valve upstream the meter or the measurement transducer in several valve
opening positions (90, 80, 65, 45).
Other flow disturbance test procedures may also be used, but justification and documentation must be
provided. If necessary, additional disturbance configurations may be defined by the technology of
the meter. Note: See also Advice Annex X.5.3.4.
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 48 of 181

5.3.5. Drum meters for alcohol


5.3.5.1 Conversion device (OIML R117-1 3.1.10.3)
The conversion device of a drum meter for alcohol is tested according to chapter 6,
requirements according to OIML R22, reference temperature 20 C.
5.3.5.2 Volume of individual measuring chambers (OIML R117-1 3.1.10.1)
The volume of an individual measuring chamber must not deviate more then 0,2% from
the mean volume.
5.3.5.3 Inclined drum axis (OIML R117-1 3.1.10.1)
Drum meters for alcohol are tested with drum axis inclined 3 to the horizontal, at minimum
flow rate.
Three independent and identical tests shall be carried out at minimum flow rate.
The change in result must not exceed half of line B in Table 2 of OIML R117-1.
5.3.5.4 Test of accuracy of the sampling device (3.1.10.4 of R117-1)
Test of error of all sampling ladles is made during one revolution of the drum. MPE of n
volumes of ladles (where n is number of chambers the drum) is 10 % of the sum of the volumes of
all ladles of the drum.
5.3.5.5 Test of volume of the containers (3.1.10.4 of R117-1)
The error of the volume compared to the nominal volume (stated in the type approval) shall
not exceed;
5 % for the collecting containers (for samples)
-5 % for the volume of the inserting containers (for checking evaporation)
-2,5 % for the surge container (for liquid if the drum gets stuck in the small size meter)
5.3.5.6 Test of accuracy of the thermometer (3.1.10.6 of R117-1)
Accuracy of thermometer indication maximum temperature (to indicate a too high
evaporation) shall not exceed 1 C.
Note: Tests according 5.4.5.4, 5.4.5.5 and 5.4.5.6 are not intended for volume measurement, they are
intended for revenue.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 49 of 181

5.3.6

Other functional tests or requirements

5.3.6.1 Adjustment device (OIML R117-1 3.1.3)


If the meter has a sealable adjustment device, the resolution shall permit an adjustment within:
0.05 % for meters intended for measuring systems with accuracy class 0.3;
0.1 % for meters intended for measuring systems with all other accuracy classes.
5.3.6.2 Correction device (OIML R117-1 3.1.4)
The correction device is always considered as an integral part of the meter, and the requirements are
applied to the corrected quantity.
The manufacturer must declare the correction device used. In combination with 5.4.2 and 5.4.3 the
non-corrected and corrected quantity are compared to the correction applied. The correction shall
only reduce the errors to as close to zero as possible (OIML R117-1 3.1.4.3). See also checklist .
5.3.6.3 Checking facilities (OIML R117-1 4.3.2)
See checklist in R117-3 Section ________.

5.4

Endurance test

Object of the test


To determine the long-term stability of the meter sensor/measuring device. This test is only
relevant for meters with moving parts.
General information
An endurance test should be carried out at a flowrate between 0,8 x Qmax and Qmax of the
measurement transducer using the liquid the measurement transducer is intended to measure or a
liquid with similar characteristics.
The measurement transducer shall be of the same type and model as used for the accuracy
test, but need not be the same individual device. (Reference section 5.3.2)
When the transducer is intended to measure different liquids, the test should be carried out
with the liquid that provides the most severe conditions (normally the liquid of lowest viscosity).
An accuracy test shall precede the endurance test.
In principle the duration of the endurance test shall be 100 hours in one or several periods.
Details of these test procedures shall be fully documented in the test report (including the choice of
test liquid).
After the endurance test, the measurement transducer is subject to an accuracy test. The
deviation between the mean value of the errors after and before the endurance test shall remain
within line B of Table 2 in OIML R117-1 without any changes of the adjustment or corrections, as
specified in section 3.1.2.3 of OIML R 117-1.
Test procedure
1
2

Perform accuracy tests in accordance with 5.3.2 at 3 flowrates (Qmin, 0.25-0.40


x Qmax, and 0.80 1.00 x Qmax ).
Calculate vi (B) for each flowrate.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 50 of 181

5
6
Note:

5.5

Operate the transducer for 100 hours at a flowrate between 0,8 x Qmax and
Qmax. For practical reasons, the volume may be divided in a number of
deliveries.
Perform an accuracy test in accordance with 5.3.2 at the same three flowrates..
The unit price Pu shall be the same as during the initial accuracy test (only
relevant for mechanical calculating/indicating devices).
Calulate vi (A) and the difference vi (A) - vi (B) for each flowrate.
Fill in test report _______.

If appropriate, the results from the accuracy tests according 5.3.2 can be used for step 1 of
the test procedure. In this situation the middle flow rate is next lower flow rate from 5.3.2.

Accuracy on the minimum measured quantity

Object of the test


To determine the error of volume indication Evi when the transducer delivers the minimum
measured quantity.
Note: This testing requirement is not applicable for pipeline applications. For pipeline
meters this test may be replaced by an evaluation/calculation of mmq considering cyclic
volume, resolution, time constant and flowrate.
General information
The manufacturer or the applicant for OIML Certification of a measurement transducer has
to define the minimum measured quantity.
An accuracy test is made with a test volume equal to the minimum measured quantity at two
flowrates, at Qmin and at the highest attainable flowrate, with standing start and stop (if applicable).
Three independent and identical tests shall be carried out at each flowrate.
The Ev must not exceed 2 times line B of Table 2 of OIML R117-1.
Note : The requirements on uncertainty given in section 4.2 may not be fulfilled due to
large scale interval of indicator of the EUT.
If the measurement transducer is intended to be used with a mechanical calculator/indicating
device, the tests shall be performed at the unit price which corresponds to the maximum torque. This
is generally near the maximum unit price.
For electronic calculator/indicating devices the set unit price is not relevant.
Fill in test report ________.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 51 of 181

5.6

Additional testing procedures for electronic measuring devices (sensor + transducer)

5.6.1

General information
For electronic measuring devices, additional tests shall be performed. These tests aim at
verifying that the electronic devices comply with the provisions of section 4.1.1 of OIML R 117-1
with regard to influence quantities.
a)

Performance tests under the effect of influence factors:


When subjected to the effect of influence factors the equipment shall continue
to operate correctly and the errors shall not exceed the applicable maximum
permissible errors.

b)

Performance tests under the effect of disturbances:


For interruptible systems, when subjected to external disturbances the
equipment shall either continue to operate correctly or detect and indicate the
presence of any significant faults. For non-interuptible systems, no significant
fault shall occur.

5.6.2

Test equipment
As described in section 5.2.

5.6.3

Test procedures
As described in the Section 4 with the following remarks:

Test only at one flow rate/simulated flow or at zero flow, with 3 tests for Influence and one test
for Disturbance.
The internal processes in an electronic meter under no-flow conditions are almost identical to those
taking place under flowing condition; therefore, these tests need not be performed under flowing
conditions. Tests under reference conditions should then also be performed under no-flow
conditions.
For electromagnetic, Coriolis and ultrasonic flowmeters it is usually necessary to fill the flowsensor
with (conductive) liquid, to be able to get it in proper operating order.
If the test is performed under no-flow condition, set the low-flow-cut-off and damping to zero, so
changes can be observed.

Temperature measurement:
Electronic meters may be fitted with an internal temperature probe. When the temperature
measurement is intended for internal corrections, the device is regarded to be an integral part of the
meter, and is included in the testing.
Pressure measurement:
Pressure transmitters may be connected to an electronic meter for various purposes. If intended for
correction, the pressure transmitter is considered as a part of the correction device and is included in
the testing.
Test under reference conditions
Before the series of tests, the EUTs performance under reference conditions is verified.
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 52 of 181

For all types of electronic meters, the flowrate indicated under reference conditions is the basis for
all further performance tests.

5.6.3.1

Test Method, Influence test type A

The object of an influence test is to verify that the electronic meter operates within its maximum
permissible errors. Influence tests simulate the instruments rated operating conditions.
Ambient temperature tests are only relevant when liquid temperature does not create the meter
temperature completely.
During this type of Influence test, the meters flow indication is used to determine if the meter still
operates within the MPEs. However, maximum permissible errors apply to volume / mass and not
flowrate. By calculating the effect of an observed change in flowrate on the devices minimum
flowrate, the maximum influence on a volume / mass measurement is calculated, which must be
smaller than the MPE. Expressed mathematically:
(change in flowrate / minimum flowrate) * 100% < MPE
Please note that the effect decreases with increasing flowrate.

5.6.3.2

Test Method, Influence test type B

The only difference between an influence test of type A and B is that during a test of type B, the
instrument is switched off when the influence factor is applied to the instrument. The instruments
performance is verified after the test. Typically these tests simulate conditions that the instrument is
subjected to when it is not operating.
5.6.3.3

Test Method, Disturbance test

The object of a disturbance test is to verify that the instruments behaviour does not change too
much, due to the effects of disturbances. A disturbance test simulates conditions conditions that
are not considered to be a rated operating condition.
During the presence of the disturbances, the device's flowrate indication must constantly be
monitored for changes. The largest of these changes shall be no larger than the significant fault,
when calculated as for Influence tests.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 53 of 181

6
Testing Procedures for electronic calculators (that may be
equipped with a conversion device), indicating devices, and associated
devices.
6.1

General Information

Tests are performed under reference conditions.


The software and configuration shall be checked according the applicable requirements in Section 4
and the checklist in R117-3.
Reference tests required in Section 6 are to be conducted before each test and after the final test of
the day.
Results of testing conducted in accordance with Section 6 will be recorded in the applicable Sections
of R117-3.
6.1.1

Test setup
For electronic calculators and indication devices, the reference flow can be simulated (for
instance by using a motor-driven pulser or electronic pulse simulator). In the case where the
indicator is an integrated part of an electronic meter sensor, an electronic offset may be
created to simulate a flow indication. Calculators often accept a range of input sensitivity.
The calculator input sensitivity must be set to the maximum. Sufficient pulses shall be
applied to meet an uncertainty of 1/5 of the MPE fault limit to be verified. It is advisable to
apply at least 10000 pulses to minimize the uncertainty caused by pulse-counting.
One of the following approaches shall be used:
First approach:
(when associated measuring devices are included)
For the associate measuring instrument the reference method is applied like for example a
temperature bath and/or pressure balance and/or reference liquid (to provide reference values
for temperature, pressure, and density).
Second approach:
Simulated signals representing temperature, pressure and/or density are applied onto the
EUTs inputs.
The true values for the simulated quantities are derived from the applied reference method,
for example temperature is derived from the connected resistor (in case of simulated
temperature dependent resistances); pressure can be derived from a generated current (in case
of 4 20 mA pressure input).

6.1.2 Accuracy tests


Using an appropriate reference method, the values of the parameter characterizing the liquid
are applied to the EUT.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 54 of 181

6.1.3

Influence factor tests


For description of the tests see Section 4:
Dry heat:
Cold:
Damp heat cyclic:
Vibration (random):
AC mains voltage variation:
DC mains voltage variation :

see 4.8.5,
see 4.8.6
see 4.8.7.
see 4.8.8
see 4.9.2.1
see 4.9.2.2:

During the climate tests, the equipment used for simulation of the deliveries and associated
measuring instruments is kept outside the climatic chamber.
For each test the severity levels shall be determined as shown in A.10.3, A.10.4 and A.11.1
of part 1.
The test severities for the tests are mentioned in the applicable articles A.10 and A.11 of part
1.
6.1.4

Electronic disturbance tests


For the severity levels see Section 4.9.1.1
For the description of the tests, see the following sections:
4.9.3 :
4.9.4 :
4.9.5 :
4.9.6 :
4.9.7 :
4.9.8 :
4.9.9 :
4.9.10 :
4.9.11.1 :
4.9.11.2 :
4.9.11.3 :
4.10.2 :
4.10.3 :

AC mains voltage dips, short interruptions and voltage variations


Bursts (transients) on AC and DC mains
Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
Fast transients/bursts on signal, data and control lines
Surges on signal, data and control lines
Voltage dips, short interruptions and voltage variations on DC mains power
Ripple on DC input power ports
Surges on AC and DC mains lines
Radiated, radio frequency, electromagnetic fields of general origin
Radiated, radio frequency, electromagnetic fields specifically caused by
digital telephones
Conducted radio-frequency fields
Voltage variations (road vehicle battery)
Electrical transient conduction along supply lines (road vehicle battery)

In case of the radio frequency immunity tests, the equipment used for simulation of the deliveries
and associated measuring instruments is kept outside the radio frequency chamber in order to
prevent the simulation equipment being disturbed by the RF field.

6.2

Electronic calculators and indicating devices

6.2.1

Accuracy tests (see future tables in R117-3)

Using an appropriate reference method, three simulated flowrates (frequencies) are applied to the
EUT: the minimum, medium and maximum value.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 55 of 181

Based on the values applied by means of the reference methods and the volume (or mass, if that is
the primary measurement signal) indicated by the calculator / indicating device the indicated value is
compared with reference value.
The value of the maximum permissible error for this device is specified in part 1 clause 2.8.

6.2.2 Influence factor tests


Dry heat test and cold tests
Before, during, and after the dry heat test and cold test, a delivery shall be simulated.
During the dry heat and cold test, the indicated quantity value is compared with the reference value.
Damp heat cyclic test and vibration test
Before and after the damp heat cyclic test and the vibration test, a simulated delivery is
generated.
The indicated quantity value after the damp heat cyclic test and vibration test is compared
with the reference value.
During the damp heat cyclic test and the vibration test, the power is switched off.
The value of the maximum permissible error for this device is specified in part 1 clause 2.8.

6.2.3

Electrical disturbance tests

Before each test, reference deliveries are generated to determine the intrinsic error.
During the disturbance a simulated delivery is made, the indication of the indication device is
compared with the reference values.
Maximum allowable variation

Checking facilities shall detect a malfunction and act upon it in accordance with part 1, clause 4.3.
For non-interruptible systems: no significant faults shall occur.

6.3

Conversion device (as part of an electronic calculator)

6.3.1

First approach

6.3.1.1

Accuracy tests

If regarded as an Electronic Conversion Device, the applied associated measuring devices are
considered to be an integral part of the conversion device. Consequently, a Conformity Assessment
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 56 of 181

is only valid for the EUT, if applied in combination with the associated measuring device submitted
with it for Conformity Assessment.
During tests, the specific test conditions need to be applied to the ECD including its associated
measuring devices, using the reference method.
The indicated converted quantity value is compared with the reference converted value (using a
internationally accepted method).
For each of the applicable characteristics of the liquid (i.e. temperature, pressure, density, relative
density, etc.) the minimum, medium, and maximum values are applied. Based on the values
represented by the simulated signals, the indications of the converted quantities are verified.

For the verification of the conversion of the unconverted volume, measured or derived from
simulated input, is assumed to be without error.
The value of the maximum permissible error for this device is specified in part 1 clause 2.7.1.2
Note: mpe requirement shall not be less than half of the minimum specified quantity
deviation.
6.3.1.2 Influence factor tests
If the transducers and the sensor of the associated measuring devices are separated, only the
transducers together with the flowcomputer are placed in the climate room.
For each of the applicable characteristics of the liquid (i.e. temperature, pressure, density, relative
density, etc.) the medium value is applied and evaluated.
Dry heat test and cold tests
A delivery is simulated before, during, and after the dry heat test and cold test.
During the dry heat and cold test, the indicated converted quantity value is compared with
the reference converted value (using an internationally accepted method).
Damp heat cyclic test and vibration test
A delivery is simulated before and after the damp heat cyclic test and the vibration test.
The indicated converted quantity value after the damp heat cyclic test is compared with the
reference converted value (using an international accepted method).
During the damp heat cyclic test and the vibration test, the power is switched off.
The value of the maximum permissible error for this device is specified in part 1 clause 2.7.1.2.
Note: mpe requirement shall not be less than half of the minimum specified quantity
deviation.
6.3.1.3 Electrical disturbance tests
Before and during the tests, a simulated delivery is generated.
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 57 of 181

For each of the applicable characteristics of the liquid (i.e. temperature, pressure, density, relative
density, etc.) the medium, value is applied and evaluated.
During the tests, the indicated converted value is compared with the reference converted value
(using an internationally accepted method).
Before and after each test, a reference non-converted value is generated to determine the intrinsic
error.
All the different components are subject of the tests.
Maximum allowable variation
For interruptible systems:
The value of the maximum permissible error for this device is specified in part 1 clause 2.7.1.3.
For non-interruptible systems: no significant errors shall occur.

6.3.2

Second Approach

6.3.2.1 Accuracy tests of the calculator/conversion device


Following this second approach for the testing of a conversion device, it is possible to verify
separately the accuracy of the associated measuring devices and to verify that the provisions for the
calculator / indication device with conversion device are fulfilled.
The values represented by the simulated signals are to be compared with the values indicated by the
flowcomputer.
In the case of conversion devices with configurable input sensitivity (measured unit per input signal
unit) the input sensitivity must be set to the maximum.
For each of these quantities, the minimum, medium, and maximum values are applied. Based on the
values represented by the simulated signals, the indications of the quantities are verified.(see part 1:
table 4.1)
Based on internationally accepted standards and the values represented by the simulated signals, the
correctness of the conversion calculation(s) are verified. (see part 1: clause 2.7.2.1.3)
For the verification of the calculations, tests need to be performed at three points distributed over the
range of the equation. For equations split into sections, three tests in each section need to be
performed.
For the verification of the conversion calculation, the measured volume or the volume derived from
a simulated input is assumed to be without error.
If the signals to simulate the associated measuring devices are digital, the MPE and significant fault
limit of the indications are restricted to rounding errors. (see part 1, clause 2.7.2.1.1)
6.3.2.2 Influence factor tests of the conversion/calculator device
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 58 of 181

For each of the applicable characteristics of the liquid (i.e. temperature, pressure, density, relative
density, etc.) the medium, value is applied and evaluated.
Dry heat test and cold tests
Before and after the dry heat test and cold tests, a simulated delivery is generated.
During the dry heat and cold test the indicated converted quantity value is compared with the
reference converted value (using a international accepted method).
Damp heat cyclic test and vibration test
Before and after the damp heat cyclic test and vibration test, a simulated delivery is
generated.
The indicated converted quantity value after the damp heat cyclic test and vibration test is
compared with the reference converted value (using an international accepted method).
During cyclic test, and vibration test the power is switched off
Maximum permissible error: see part 1, clause 2.7.2.1, table 4.1.
If the signals to simulate the associated measuring devices are digital, the MPE and significant fault
limit of the indications are restricted to rounding errors. (see part 1, clause 2.7.2.1.1)
6.3.2.3 Electronic disturbance tests of the conversion/calculating device
Before each test, a simulated reference delivery is generated to determine the intrinsic error.
For each of the applicable characteristics of the liquid (i.e. temperature, pressure, density, relative
density, etc.) the medium, value is applied and evaluated.
The equipment used to simulate the signals shall not be influenced by the tests.
The quantities and the conversion calculation are verified using the values represented by the
simulated signals and internationally accepted standards.
Maximum allowable variations: see part 1, clause 2.7.2.1, table 4.1.
If the signals to simulate the associated measuring devices are digital, the MPE and significant fault
limit of the indications are restricted to rounded errors. (see part 1, clause 2.7.2.1.1)
Checking facilities shall detect a malfunction and act upon it accordance part 1, clause 4.3.
For non-interruptible systems: no significant faults shall occur.

6.4

Associated Measuring Devices

6.4.1

Accuracy tests of associated measuring devices

The associated measuring device is subjected to a known temperature, pressure or density. During
tests, the specific test conditions need to be applied to the associated measuring devices using a
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 59 of 181

reference method, (for example: a temperature bath and/or pressure balance and/or reference liquid
(true values)). Traceable and documented laboratory reference equipment shall be used. The values
indicated by the calculator/indicating device for each of the characteristic quantities shall be used to
determine the error for each of the associated measuring devices.
In the case of conversion devices with configurable input sensitivity (measured unit per input signal
unit) the input sensitivity must be set to the maximum.
Three values of each of the parameters characterizing the liquid are applied to the EUT: the
minimum, median, and maximum value.
Based on the values applied by means of the reference method(s), the correctness of the values for
temperature, pressure and/or density indicated on the Electronic Conversion Device or other
indicating device is verified.
6.4.2

Influence factor tests on associated measuring devices

Dry heat test and cold tests


Before, during, and after the dry heat test and cold tests, the indicated measured value is
compared with the reference value.
Damp heat cyclic test and vibration test
Before and after the damp heat cyclic test and vibration tests, the indicated measured value is
compared with the reference value.
During damp heat cyclic test and the vibration test, the power is switched off
For each of the applicable characteristics of the liquid (i.e. temperature, pressure, density, relative
density, etc.) the medium, value is applied and evaluated.
Maximum permissible error: see part 1, tables 4.2 and 4.3.

6.4.3

Electrical disturbance tests on associated measuring devices

Before each test the indicated value is compared with the reference value to determine the intrinsic
error
The reference equipment shall not be influenced by the tests
The correctness of the quantities indications are verified by comparing them with the reference
values. For each of the applicable characteristics of the liquid (i.e. temperature, pressure, density,
relative density, etc.) the medium, value is applied and evaluated.
Maximum permissible error: see R117-1, tables 4.2 and 4.3.
6.5

Temperature conversion: Tests on response time of the measuring system temperature


sensor.
See part 1, clauses 3.7.7 and 6.1.10 for further discussions on these requirements.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 60 of 181

The desired temperature change is applied to the EUT using a suitable reference method. The
output from the sensor has to be able to respond to 90% of a temperature step-change within
15 seconds or (if larger) within a time corresponding to the time needed to deliver, at Qmax, a
quantity of twice the MMQ.
In the case of fuel dispensers, this would result in maximum time constants (Tau) as found in
the following table:
Table for Section 6.5

Qmax [L/min]

40

80

130

200

MMQ [L]

10

20

50

Time [s]

15.00

15.00

18.46

30.00

Maximum Tau [s]

6.51

6.51

8.02

13.03

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 61 of 181

Chapter 7 Testing procedures for gas elimination devices


7.1 General Information
Section 7 covers testing procedures for all three kinds of gas elimination devices mentioned in
R117-1, 2.10: gas separators, gas extractors, special gas extractors.
The gas elimination device may either be type approved as a unit separate from the measuring
system (MS) for which it is intended (see 7.2.1), or tested as a unit forming part of MS during type
approval of the MS (see 7.2.2).
Note 1:
In practice, the MS subject to approval or verification is not tested in order to check the
performance on gas elimination. In fact, the performance of the gas elimination device is
established a priori on a specimen of the gas elimination device as a unit separate from the
MS for which it is intended. The decision of fitting a MS with a given kind of gas elimination
device is based on an examination considering the worst conditions in which the MS could
operate.
Note 2:
For the purpose of this section 7, the term gas is used as a general term for air/gas or
for mixtures of air and gas.
Note 3:
For testing a gas elimination device, usually air is used as the gas introduced into the liquid,
but any other appropriate gas (e.g. nitrogen) may be used as well.
In the case that the gas elimination device is a separate unit (see 7.2.1), it is examined whether a
type of a gas elimination device complies with the requirements in R117-1, 2.10.
A specimen of that type must be installed on a suitable test bench. The test bench comprises among others of a pump upstream of the gas elimination device under test, of a liquid meter
and of a standard, both located downstream of the gas elimination device.
The standard of the test bench serves the purpose to determine the volume Vn (without gas) of the
delivered liquid without gas; so a suitable standard (e.g. a standard capacity tank) must be used
from which gas entrapped in the liquid can escape freely.
The liquid meter of the test bench serves the purpose to determine the volume of both the
delivered liquid and of the gas left over in the liquid downstream of the gas elimination device;
so the liquid meter is a measure for the efficiency of the gas elimination device, with its meter
errors Evi (with gas).
Note: Concerning the type of the liquid meter, positive displacement meters are preferred
because of their ability to measure the actual volume of liquid and of gas.
Prior to or after the determination of the meter errors Evi (with gas), the liquid meter has to be tested
without gas in order to determine its meter errors Evi (without gas). The difference of the meter errors
Evi (with gas) - Evi (without gas) represents the effect due the influence of gas on the measuring result.
For the purpose of section 7 these values are denoted as the effect of the gas elimination device
which shall not exceed the values of R117-1, 2.10.1.
Note: These values of R117-1, 2.10.1 do not depend on the accuracy class of the measuring
system, but on the type of the liquid.
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 62 of 181

The type approval certificate of the gas elimination device shall clearly define the kind of gas
elimination device which has been tested; in the case of gas separators information shall be given
whether the gas separator has been approved also as a gas extractor.
Note:
According to R117-1, 2.10.2, a gas separator shall also be approved as a gas extractor if
gaseous formations such as gas/air pockets liable to have a specific effect greater than 1 %
of the minimum measured quantity can occur as well. So, if such tests have been carried out
on the gas separator, the relevant information shall be given in the type approval certificate.
In the case that the gas elimination device is a unit forming part of a MS (see 7.2.2), it shall be
examined whether the type of the gas elimination device resp. the individual gas elimination
device complies with the requirements in R117-1, 2.10.
A specimen of that type resp. the individual gas elimination device must be installed in the MS,
for which it is intended.
For the standard, the same applies as in the paragraph above.
For the liquid meter, the same applies as in the paragraph above, but the liquid meter is part of
the MS; when the liquid meter of the MS is not capable of measuring the actual volume of gas
(e.g. meters of the Coriolis type), during the gas elimination device test this liquid meter must be
substituted by an appropriate type.
7.2 Testing
7.2.1 Test of a gas elimination device as a separate unit
Tests on gas elimination devices should be carried out for flow rates up to a maximum of 100 m/h.
For higher flow rates, characteristics may be determined by analogy with equipment of the same
design and smaller dimensions.
Note:
From long term experience it can be assumed that in general, gas elimination devices for
flow rates 100 m/h comply when their effective volume (volume between inlet and outlet)
is - as a guide value - 8 % (maybe even less) of the quantity passing through the gas
elimination device at Qmax during 1 min.
The test for flow rates 100 m/h is (on reasons of a lack of appropriate testing facilities for
such high flow rates) not feasible and therefore it is desirable when the characteristics of big
sizes could be determined by analogy to smaller sizes: for gas elimination devices for flow
rates 100 m/h the guide value that they comply is about twice the above mentioned value
of 8 %; nevertheless, for the acceptance of the determination by analogy, the manufacturer
of the gas elimination device should underpin the assumption of conformity by valuable
calculations, and the acceptance of these calculations should be up to the authority in
charge of type approval.
Please note that for the determination by analogy, parameters like Reynolds number and
Froude number are not acceptable to underpin the assumption of conformity because these
parameters are valid only for one-phase-fluids but which are not present when testing gas
elimination devices.
The test liquid should either have the viscosity for which the device is intended or a greater one. If
the gas elimination device meets the 0,5 %-criterion in R117-1, 2.10.1 with a test liquid of a
viscosity greater than 1 mPas (at 20 C), no additional tests with a test liquid of a viscosity 1
mPas are required.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 63 of 181

As a general rule, the test volume of a test run shall be at least the volume of liquid without gas,
delivered during one minute at Qmax of the gas elimination device.
The gas is either introduced by injection downstream of the pump, or by suction upstream of the
pump.
In case of injection (which makes it possible to operate without changing the performance of the
pump due to the entry of gas) the liquid and gas flows are adjusted by means of control valves.
In case of suction (which yields a pressure reduction by suction and by this reproduces the
conditions in reality) the pump (before gas is added) must be set to Qmax of the gas elimination
device (if the pump flow capacity is higher than needed it has to be adjusted accordingly). The
pump should preferably be of the displacement type but it may also be of the centrifugal type if
the supply tank feeds the pump by gravity.
The gas flow must then be regulated by a valve positioned upstream of the pump.
Temporary note: Although pressure reduction is in the text of R117:1995, it seems that gas
flow makes more sense.
The gas inlet is fitted with a shut-off/control valve and a non-return valve to prevent liquid from
entering the gas inlet and draining out of the of the test bench.
A sight glass is installed in the liquid pipework downstream of the gas inlet and upstream of the gas
elimination device in order that the added gas can be observed in the liquid. The added gas has to be
clearly visible in the sight glass.
Note:
When testing gas elimination devices gas and liquid should normally be present as separate
phases; this two-phase-state must be observable (by the sight glass).
If, during the test, the liquid pressure is relatively high (above 2 bar), the gas could get
dissolved in the liquid and this would make the function of removing gas from the liquid in a
two-phase-state impossible to test. On the other hand, in order to achieve the required Qmax,
it might become necessary to increase the liquid pressure P to a relatively high value (e.g.
above 2 bar), with the consequence that the gas gets dissolved (the need for such a
(relatively high) pressure may either lie in the characteristic of the test bench or of the gas
elimination device or of both).
But even though this testing condition does not correspond to the desired two-phase-state, if
the gas elimination device complies at the (relatively high) pressure P and this pressure is
defined as the minimum admissible pressure of the gas elimination device, the gas
elimination device will also comply when used at any other pressure minimum admissible
pressure.
The volume of gas continuously entering the liquid is measured by a gas meter and isothermally
converted to atmospheric pressure on the basis of the indication of a manometer fitted upstream of
the gas meter.
The liquid pressure must be measured directly downstream of the gas elimination device resp.
upstream of the liquid meter to determine the lowest pressure at which the gas elimination device
still meets the values in R117-1, 2.10.1.
A sight glass, downstream of the gas elimination device, is used to check that the gas is no longer
visible in the liquid.
Note: A slanting in the pipe work downstream of the liquid meter should be avoided to
ensure that gas bubbles can escape in the normal way thus keeping this pipework filled to
the same level at the start and at the end of the test.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 64 of 181

In the case where the gas elimination device is provided with an automatic stop-valve, the tests have
to be carried out with this valve installed in the test bench.
Note:
The test report for the gas elimination device has either to indicate the type of this valve or
its characteristics concerning the shut off-speed. In the case of pneumatic driven valves, the
test report should also indicate the length of the pneumatic control line between the gas
elimination device and its automatic stop-valve.
Consequently the measuring system may either use the indicated type or a type of the same
characteristics, and the length of the pneumatic control line shall be the length indicated
by the test report.
7.2.1.1 Gas separator test
Acc. to R117-1, 2.10.8, a gas separator designed for Qmax 20 m3/h shall ensure the elimination of
any proportion by volume of gases relative to the measured liquid; the maximum proportion is 30 %
gas for gas separators with a Qmax > 20 m/h . The volume of gas Va is measured at atmospheric
pressure in determining its percentage.
The gas separator must separate the added gas up to the values in R117-1, 2.10.1, and must stay
fully functional.
An example of a test bench which continuously adds gas to the liquid is shown in Advice Annex
X.7.4, Figure 1.
Note:
According to R117-1, 2.10.2, a gas separator shall also be approved as a gas extractor in
the case where gaseous formations such as gas pockets liable to have a specific effect
greater than 1 % of the minimum measured quantity can occur in the measuring system as
well. So, if this is the case, the same tests as on gas extractors have to also be performed on
gas separators.

7.2.1.1.1 Test procedure


All test runs must start and finish with the gas inlet closed and with the delivery pipe of the test
bench full and pressurized.
First determine the (relative) errors Evi (without gas) of the liquid meter at least from Qmax to Qmin of
the gas separator without adding gas, at the minimum pressure achievable on the test bench (e.g. < 2
bar) (leading to the error curve of the liquid meter under no gas conditions).
Determine the list of flow rates acc. to R117-2, 5.3.2.1.
Then determine the (relative) errors Evi (with gas) of the liquid meter by continuously adding gas to the
liquid, in increasing amounts of the gas/liquid ratio up to the maximum proportion (leading to the
error curve of the liquid meter under gas conditions). This procedure shall be terminated under the
condition of either a) or b):
a) when it covers the entire range of gas/liquid ratio Va/Vn
b) when discharge stops automatically.
-

For each test run at a given gas/liquid ratio start the test run at Qmax of the gas separator, at the
minimum pressure achievable on the test bench, with the gas inlet closed. When Qmax is reached,
introduce gas of the required proportion by regulating the flow rate of gas by using the air inlet
throttle valve.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 65 of 181

Note: The flow rates of the liquid meter obtained under gas conditions need not be
necessarily the same as under no gas conditions.
Note the gas bubbles in the sight glass of the test bench upstream the gas separator.
Check the liquid and gas flow rate together with the pressure values.
-

Stop the flow of gas and liquid when the test volume of the liquid is reached; in the case where
there is no flow for more than 10 seconds before the test volume of the liquid is reached, close
the gas inlet and terminate the test run until the test volume of the liquid is reached.
Read the liquid volume Vs of the liquid standard and the volume Vi indicated by the liquid meter
and calculate Vn. Measurement results gained below Qmin shall be disregarded.
Convert the (corrected) volume indication Vmetered gas of the gas meter at the pressure pt to the
amount of added gas Va at the atmospheric pressure patmospheric by
Va

Vmetered gas ( pt

patmospheric )

patmospheric

In the case of sucked-in gas assume pt = 0.


Calculate the ratio of Va / Vn and the (relative) meter error Evi (with gas) = (Vi -Vn)/Vn and
determine the difference between Evi (with gas) and Evi (without gas) as the effect of the gas separator
due to the added gas.
Note: As the flow rates of the liquid meter obtained under gas conditions need not be
necessarily the same as under no gas conditions, calculate the difference between the error
curve under no gas conditions and the error curve under gas conditions.
7.2.1.2 Gas extractor test
The test bench has a gas reservoir for creating a gas pocket; care shall be taken that upstream of the
gas extractor the liquid and gas are still present as separate phases and that the injected gas does not
get dissolved in the liquid (thus conflicting with the test conditions of R117-1, 2.10.9, first
paragraph requiring a gas pocket).
The other parts of the liquid pipework upstream of the meter must be kept full. The gas pocket is
then added to the liquid at Qmax of the gas extractor.
The volume of the gas pocket under atmospheric pressure is the minimum measured quantity of
the gas extractor.
Note 1: The MMQ of the gas extractor is defined by the applicant, but as a general rule the
minimum measured quantity (MMQ) of the gas extractor should be set to a volume
corresponding to the flow at Qmin during 1 minute (if only Qmax is known, then Qmin can be
derived from the permissible ratio between the maximum and the minimum flowrates of the
measuring system according to R117-1, 2.3.3.3).
Note 2:
R117-1, 2.10.9, first paragraph requires that the created gas pocket must not be smaller than
MMQ, but does not require that the gas pocket is greater than MMQ.
Note 3: The volume of the gas pocket defines the necessary volume of the gas reservoir; in
the case where the necessary volume at atmospheric pressure patmospheric is not provided, the
gas pocket may also be created at a pressure pt, with patmospheric pt Pmin of the gas
extractor (by then converting the volume of the gas pocket at pt to the volume of the gas
pocket at patmospheric).

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 66 of 181

An example of test bench which adds gas pockets to the liquid is shown in Advice Annex
X.7.4, Figure 2.

7.2.1.2.1 Gas pocket test


Make an initial test run without a gas pocket, at Qmax of the gas extractor and at the minimum
pressure.
Note: In order to avoid that gas could get dissolved in the liquid the pressure should be
< 2 bar.
Then make three test runs by adding the gas pocket of the required volume to the liquid.
Test steps
1. Vent the liquid pipework completely from entrapped gas and create the gas pocket.
2. Perform the test run at Qmax and the lowest liquid pressure. When Qmax is reached, open the
gas reservoir / the injection valve to discharge the gas pocket into the liquid stream.
3. After the gas extractor had acted upon the gas pocket, the flow rate will resume Qmax; continue
the delivery at Qmax and stop it when the test volume of the liquid is reached.
4. Read the standard volume Vs and the volume Vi indicated by the meter and calculate Vn from Vs.
Calculate the meter error Evi (with gas) = (Vi -Vn) and determine the difference between the meter
error Evi (with gas) and Evi (without gas) as the absolute error of the gas elimination device due to the
added gas.
Note: Gas is not added continuously but only once during the test run, so that Evi (with gas) will
occur only once and independently from the delivered liquid volume. Therefore, for the
determination of the difference between the meter error Evi (with gas) and Evi (without gas), the
absolute (and not the relative) error has to be considered. The difference then must be 1 %
of the volume of the added gas pocket.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 67 of 181

7.2.1.3 Special gas extractor test


Note:
Special gas extractors are mainly (but not exclusively) used for measuring systems on road
tankers when compartments are completely emptied (operation of the special gas extractor as a
gas extractor), but gas can also occur which is continuously and slightly mixed with the liquid
(operation of the special gas extractor as a gas separator under the conditions of R117-1, 2.10.9
second paragraph).
-

For the gas extractor function of special gas extractors not intended for road tankers the analogue
tests as on gas extractors described in 7.2.1.2 must be carried out.
For the gas extractor function of special gas extractors intended for road tankers see 7.2.1.4.
In order to determine the effect of the gas elimination device arising from gaseous formations
such as pockets, the supply tank is filled with the test volume. The liquid is then emptied through
the meter into the standard without operating the start/stop valve of the test bench. For deliveries
not by pump but by gravity, a pipework of the test bench is used which bypasses the pump.
In the case where there is an automatic shut-off valve installed in the liquid pipework of the test
bench and operated by the special gas extractor, the gas pocket may be created by emptying the
pipework between the supply tank and the gas extractor.
Note: In the case where the test bench has more than one supply tank, a more common way
to carry out the gas pocket test is to switch during the delivery to an empty supply tank; the
switching test covers the gas pocket test.

For the gas separator function of special gas extractors the test with continuous gas supply as on
gas separators in 7.2.1.1 must be carried out at Qmax of the special gas extractor, but with the gas
proportion as defined in R117-1, 2.10.9 second paragraph.
Note:
The maximum achievable flow rate for MS on road tankers with gravity discharge is
normally below Qmax of the special gas extractor. To reach Qmax of the special gas extractor
(in order to meet the requirement of R117-1 for testing at Qmax) the gravity discharge must
be supported by simulating an increased static height. This can be accomplished by
pressurizing the supply tank. An increase of around 0.4 bar (which could vary due to the
used test bench) results in a simulated increase of the static height by 4 m). A pressure
regulator shall guarantee a stable gas pressure in the supply tank during the tests.
The gas is either injected into the supply pipework or sucked in upstream of the pump, by
creating an entry of gas over a gas meter and partly closing the valve of the supply tank.

An example of a test bench which adds to the liquid gas pockets and gas continuously is shown in
Advice Annex X.7.4, Figure 3. This test bench is similar to Figure 1 and 2, but reproduces the
actual conditions of deliveries from road tankers to underground tanks e.g. at petrol stations: the
supply tank is located above the special gas extractor and above the meter (i.e. at a level
corresponding to that of the road tanker) and the standard is located approximately 4 m below the
meter.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 68 of 181

7.2.1.4 Gas extractor function tests of the special gas extractors intended for road tankers
(viscosity 20 mPas)
The following tests must be carried out:
residual discharge test from the supply tank
gas pocket test
switching test to an empty supply tank
The switching test to an empty supply tank also covers the gas pocket test.
Notes:
The above tests cover all cases where gas pockets on road tankers occur (or might occur)
during a delivery:
The residual discharge test from the supply tank covers the (usual) case where the
compartment of a road tanker is completely emptied at the end of a delivery.
The gas pocket test covers the case that at the start of the delivery gas pockets may occur e.g.
when the pipe between the bottom valve and the special gas extractor is empty, when the
measuring system is fed by a compartment on a trailer.
The switching test to an empty supply tank (which is the most severe test method for the gas
extractor function) covers the cases.
That at at the start of the delivery gas pockets may occur e.g. when the pipe between the
bottom valve and the special gas extractor is empty, when the measuring system is fed by a
compartment on a trailer;
that gas pockets occur at measuring systems without automatic interlock of bottom valves and
where one switches during the delivery to an empty compartment.
All tests are carried out according to the specification of the special gas extractor with gravity and
pumped discharge.
7.2.1.4.1 Residual discharge test from the supply tank
This test consists of completely emptying a supply tank over the special gas extractor.
Before any test runs are carried out the test bench inclusive the line from the supply tank must be
vented of any entrapped gas.
One initial test run must be carried out without adding gas. Then make three residual discharge test
runs.
A test run is carried out with a test volume corresponding to Qmax of the special gas extractor
during 1 minute. The pipe route is enabled depending on the type of test (gravity discharge or pump
operation). During the delivery from the supply tank over the special gas extractor the supply tank
shall run completely empty.
Note:
The same consideration of Evi (with gas) as in 7.2.1.2 applies.
When the special gas extractor is provided with its own automatic stop-valve (which then shall be
installed in the test bench together with the special gas extractor), the test run is finished when the
supply tank has run completely empty and the special gas extractor doesnt open its automatic stopvalve any longer.
Note:
When the standard is a proving tank and the volume of the delivered liquid is below the
nominal capacity of the proving tank, it is necessary to fill up the proving tank to its nominal
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 69 of 181

capacity. To do so, the supply tank is refilled and a corresponding volume is delivered at
Qmax into the proving tank without gas being added.
7.2.1.4.2 Gas pocket test
This test consists of delivering a gas pocket over the special gas extractor.
Before any test runs are carried out the test bench inclusive the gas reservoir must be vented of any
entrapped gas. One initial test run must to be carried out without adding a gas pockets. Then make
three gas pocket test runs.
Prepare the gas reservoir with the gas pocket. Switch on the pump and set the test bench to Qmax of
the special gas extractor, then switch to the gas reservoir and discharge the gas pocket into the liquid
pipework over the special gas extractor. Resume the test at Qmax of the special gas extractor to have
at least one minute test duration.
Note:
The same consideration of Evi (with gas) as in 7.2.1.2 applies.

7.2.1.4.3 Switching test to an empty supply tank


This test consists of filling one out of two supply tanks with the test liquid and switching the full
supply tank to the empty supply tank during the delivery.
Before any test runs are carried out the test bench inclusive the pipes from the supply tanks must be
vented of any entrapped gas. One initial test run must to be carried out without adding any gas. Then
make three switching test runs.
The test is carried out with the volume corresponding to Qmax for 1 minute. The delivery is started
from the filled supply tank over the special gas extractor. The valves in the pipes are switched
depending on the type of test (gravity discharge or pump operation).
When the flow rate reaches Qmax, the empty supply tank is opened and then the full supply tank is
closed.
Continuation of delivery:
- Special gas extractor with its own automatic stop-valve:
When the flow is interrupted by the automatic stop-valve, the empty supply tank is closed and
the full supply tank is opened again until the volume corresponding to Qmax during 1 minute is
delivered.
- Special gas extractor without its own automatic stop valve:
When no flow is detected for 10 s, the empty supply tank is closed and the full supply tank is
opened again until the volume corresponding to Qmax during 1 minute is delivered.
Note:
The same consideration of Evi (with gas) as in 7.2.1.2 applies.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 70 of 181

7.2.2 Tests of a gas elimination device forming part of a measuring system (MS) during type
approval of the measuring system
When the gas elimination device is tested in a specimen of the type of the MS, consequently all MS
designed according to this type must comply with the specimen regarding the hydraulic conditions
under which the gas elimination device works properly. The pipe work of the test setup has to be
documented.
Notes:
In general, a MS complies with the specimen when:
Qmax of the MS in use is Qmax under test, the minimal back pressure of the gas
elimination device in use is minimal back pressure under test. In general, this pressure
condition is met when the pipework diameter upstream of the gas elimination device in
use is the corresponding pipework diameter under test and when the pipework
diameter downstream of the gas elimination device in use is the corresponding
pipework diameter under test;
moreover, the negative slope of the pipework downstream of the gas elimination
device in use is the corresponding slope under test; any means to prevent the
generation of gaseous formations such as anti-swirl devices present in the MS under test
shall also be present in the MS in use;
any means to prevent the generation of a suction downstream of the gas elimination
device (e.g. a ventilation valve in an empty hose) present in the MS under test is also
present in the MS in use.
Tests on gas elimination devices should be carried out for flow rates up to Qmax of the MS.
The test liquid should be the same as that for which the measuring system is intended. If the gas
elimination device meets the 0,5 %-criterion of R117-1, 2.10.1 with a liquid of a viscosity greater
than 1 mPas (at 20 C), no additional tests with a test liquid of a viscosity less than 1 mPas are
required.
The test volume of a test run shall be at least the volume of liquid without gas, delivered during 1
minute at Qmax of the gas elimination device.
7.2.2.1 Gas separator tests
This test particularly applies to types of separators included in MS which can be mass produced and
transported without dismantling, such as fuel dispensers fed by their own supply pumps.
The essential part of the test bench (see Figure 4) is the MS itself (in this case, the fuel dispenser).
In accordance with conditions encountered in actual use, the liquid is drawn up from the supply tank
on a lower level than the meter. The gas is drawn in upstream of the gas separator pump unit by
suction through a special inlet equipped with a control valve.
The volume of gas continuously entering the liquid is measured by a gas meter and isothermally
converted to atmospheric pressure on the basis of the indication of a manometer fitted upstream of
the gas meter. However, it is not necessary to use a gas meter if the gas separator is capable of
separating and eliminating the gas introduced in any proportion, as provided in R117-1, 2.10.8.
The requirements in R117-1, 2.10.1 and 2.10.8 shall be complied with under test conditions such
that Qmax of the MS is reached when no gas enters.

7.2.2.1.1 Test procedure for gas separators of fuel dispensers


Note: The tests are carried out in accordance with 7.2.1.1.1.
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 71 of 181

Note: According to R117-1, 2.10.8, a gas separator designed for Qmax 20 m3/h shall
ensure the elimination of any proportion by volume of gases relative to the measured liquid.
As Qmax of fuel dispensers is always 20 m3/h, the fuel dispensers must be tested whether
their gas separators are capable of separating and eliminating the gas introduced in any
proportion and therefore it is not necessary to determine the percentage of the added gas.
All test runs must start with the gas inlet closed, and with the hose full and pressurized. All test runs
must finish with the gas inlet closed and the hose pressurized. If it is expected that the hose has a
significant influence to measurement uncertainty of the measurement procedure, the hose has to be
replaced by a solid pipe work.
An example of a test bench which continuously adds gas to the liquid is shown in Advice Annex
X.7.4, Figure 4.
First determine the errors Evi (without gas) of the fuel dispenser from Qmax to Qmin without adding gas:
Set the flow rate by using a control valve between hose and nozzle, or a nozzle trigger.
Determine the list of flow rates Q(n) acc. to R117-2, 5.3.2.1 from the highest flow rate Q(1) to the
lowest flow rate Q(6) of the fuel dispenser.
Then determine the errors Evi (with gas) of the fuel dispenser at the same flow rates as above by
continuously adding gas:
- For each test run at flow rate Q(n) start the test run at Qmax of the fuel dispenser.
- Then introduce air at the suction side of the pump and adjust the flow rate through the fuel
dispenser approximately to the subsequent flow rate Q(n+1), regulating the flow rate using the
air inlet throttle valve.
- Stop the flow of gas and liquid when the test volume of the liquid is reached; in the case where
there is no flow for more than 10 seconds before the test volume of the liquid is reached, close
the gas inlet and terminate the test run until the test volume of the liquid is reached.
Measurement results gained below Q(6) shall be disregarded.
- Read the liquid volume Vs of the liquid standard and the volume Vi indicated by the liquid meter
and calculate Vn from Vs. Measurement results gained below Qmin shall be disregarded.
Note: A conversion of the (corrected) volume indication Vmetered gas of the gas meter at the
pressure pt to the amount of added gas Va at the atmospheric pressure patmospheric is not
necessary in the case of sucked-in gas.
- Calculate the (relative) meter error Evi (with gas) = (Vi -Vn)/Vn and determine the difference
between Evi (with gas) and Evi (without gas) as the effect of the gas separator due to the added gas.

7.2.2.2 Gas extractor tests


The MS comprising the gas elimination device must be constructed so that tests can be carried out as
described below.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 72 of 181

The tests are carried out as in 7.2.1.2.1, but instead of creating a gas pocket in a gas reservoir, either
the liquid pipework upstream of the gas extractor, if possible or the gas extractor itself is emptied to
an extent that it contains the gas pocket of the required volume.
Note:
The admissible Qmax of MS equipped with the tested type of a gas elimination device shall be
set equal to or below the maximum achieved flowrate.

7.2.2.3 Special gas extractor tests


The MS comprising the gas elimination device must be constructed so that tests can be carried out as
described below.
Special gas extractors not intended for MS on road tankers:
Test of the gas extractor function: The test is carried out as in 7.2.1.2.1, but instead of creating a
gas pocket in a gas reservoir, the liquid pipework upstream of the special gas extractors shall be
emptied to an extent that it contains the required gas pocket. The test runs shall be carried out at
the maximum achievable flowrate.
Note:
The Qmax of MS equipped with the tested type of the gas elimination device shall be set
maximum achieved flowrate.

the

Test of the gas separator function: The test is carried out as in 7.2.1.1.1, but with the gas
proportion as defined in R117-1, 2.10.9 second paragraph.
Gas is drawn in upstream of the special gas extractor (either by injection or by suction) through a
special inlet equipped with a control valve, at the maximum achievable flowrate. The volume of
gas is measured by a gas meter.
Special gas extractors intended for MS on road tankers:
Test of the gas extractor function:
The following tests must be carried out:
residual discharge test from a supply tank
gas pocket test
switching test to an empty supply tank
The switching test also covers the gas pocket test. In the case where the switching test is not
applicable (e.g. when an interlock of the bottom valves exists, when there is one compartment),
the gas pocket test must be carried out.
Residual discharge test from a supply tank:
The test is carried out as in 7.2.1.4.1:
The supply tank is realized by a compartment of the road tanker; the compartment is filled
with the test volume and emptied until the delivery is interrupted by the gas elimination
device.
Each test run shall be carried out at the maximum achievable flowrate for pumped discharge
and if designed, also for gravity discharge.
Note:
The Qmax of MS equipped with the tested type of the gas elimination device shall be
set the maximum achieved flowrate.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 73 of 181

For MS with empty hoses the residual discharge test shall be carried out such that the delivery
of the road tanker at a petrol station is simulated: either the standard is placed approx. 3 m
beneath the level of the empty hose valve or an under-pressure of approx. 0,3 bar is generated
in the hose (e.g. by an acceleration pump).
Care shall be taken that the meter remains completely filled with liquid during the test and
the pressure directly behind the meter does not fall below atmospheric pressure.
Gas pocket test:
The test is carried out as in 7.2.1.4.2.
Switching test to an empty supply tank:
The test is carried out as 7.2.1.4.3.
The supply tanks are realized by two compartments A and B of the road tanker.
Compartment A is filled with the test volume and compartment B is empty. During emptying
compartment A at Qmax, compartment B is opened and closed at the moment when the flow
is interrupted by the gas elimination device. The emptying of compartment A is resumed
until the delivery is again interrupted by the gas elimination device.
Each test run shall be carried at the maximum achievable flow rate.
In cases where the compartments are locked against simultaneous delivery or that the road
tanker has only one compartment, the switching test is substituted by the test of the residual
discharge from the compartment, but starting the delivery with an empty pipe between bottom
valve and special gas extractor.
Note:
The Qmax of MS equipped with the tested type of the gas elimination device shall be
set the maximum achieved flowrate.
Test of the gas separator function: The test of the gas extractor function gives sufficient
evidence that the special gas extractor meets the requirements of R117-1, 2.10.9 second
paragraph.
Note:
The Qmax of MSs equipped with the tested type of the gas elimination device shall be set
maximum achieved flowrate at the gas extractor test.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

the

Page 74 of 181

Test Procedures for Ancillary Devices

8.1

General Information

The test procedures detailed in Section 8 shall only apply to the following ancillary devices:
Printing devices;
Memory devices including Data Storage Devices (DSDs); and
Conversion devices (not part of an electronic calculator).
Electronic ancillary devices, as defined in this section, other than purely digital devices as defined
in 8.1.1, shall be tested for immunity to electrical disturbance(s),.
The influence factor tests for ancillary devices shall comply with the intended use of the device (as
specified by the manufacturer).
8.1.1 If the ancillary device is a purely digital device which:
is not required to ensure correct measurement or intended to facilitate the measuring
operations, or
could not in any way affect the measurement, and
does not include the power supply for the MI, and
is equipped with the necessary checking facilities (R117-1, 4.3.5 Checking facilities for
ancillary devices),
then influence factor tests and disturbance tests do not need to be performed on the hardware of the
Ancillary device.
8.1.2 For electronic ancillary devices powered by batteries, there is a distinction between the tests
for instruments powered by:
(a)

Disposable batteries;

(b)

General rechargeable batteries; and

(c)

Batteries of road vehicles.

In the case of disposable and rechargeable batteries of a general nature, there are no applicable
standards available.
Devices powered by non-rechargeable batteries or by rechargeable batteries that cannot be
(re)charged during the operation of the measuring system, shall comply with the following
requirements:
(a)

The device provided with new or fully charged batteries of the specified type shall
comply with the applicable metrological requirements;

(b)

As soon as the battery voltage has dropped to a value specified by the manufacturer as
the minimum value of voltage where the device complies with metrological
requirements, this shall be detected and acted upon by the device in accordance with
Section 4.2 of R117-1.
For these devices, no special tests for disturbances associated with the "mains" power are required.
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 75 of 181

Devices powered by rechargeable auxiliary batteries that are intended be (re)charged during the
operation of the measuring instrument shall both:
(a) comply with the requirements for devices powered by non-rechargeable batteries or by
rechargeable batteries that cannot be (re)charged during the operation of the measuring
system, with the mains power switched off; and
(b) comply with the requirements for AC mains powered devices with the mains power
switched on.
Devices powered by mains power and provided with a back-up battery for data-storage only, shall
comply with the requirements for AC mains powered devices.
For electronic devices powered by the on-board battery of a road vehicle, a series of special tests for
disturbances associated with the power supply are given in Section 4.10.
Notes:
Ancillary devices that are powered directly, and not provided with power from/by the
measuring device, may be tested as stand-alone units.
Ancillary devices that are provided with power from/by the measuring device shall be
tested installed in a measuring system, or equivalent simulator.
8.2

Disturbance and Influence factors tests for ancillary devices

Note: It is envisaged that the devices in this section would be DIGITAL and so Influence factors
tests, with the exception of mains voltage variations (AC or DC), would not be considered
necessary.
However, where the device is ANALOGUE then it is considered that this is addressed in section
8.2.2
8.2.1

Disturbance tests applicable to Digital ancillary devices not fulfilling the requirements
of
8.1.1, and Analogue ancillary devices

For the severity levels see Section 4.9.1.1


For the description of the tests, see the following sections:
4.9.3
AC mains voltage dips, short interruptions and voltage variations
4.9.4
Bursts (transients) on AC and DC mains
4.9.5
Electrostatic discharge (ESD)
4.9.6
Fast transients/bursts on signal, data and control lines
4.9.7
Surges on signal, data and control lines
4.9.8
Voltage dips, short interruptions and voltage variations on DC mains power
4.9.9
Ripple on DC input power ports
4.9.10
Surges on AC and DC mains lines
4.9.11.1
Radiated, radio frequency, electromagnetic fields of general origin
4.9.11.2
Radiated, radio frequency, electromagnetic fields specifically caused by
digital telephones
4.9.11.3
Conducted radio-frequency fields
4.10.2
Voltage variations (road vehicle battery)
4.10.3
Electrical transient conduction along supply lines (road vehicle battery)

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 76 of 181

8.2.2 Influence factors tests applicable to Digital ancillary devices not fulfilling the
requirements of 8.1.1, and Analogue ancillary devices.
For the severity levels see Section 4.9.1.1
For the description of the tests, see the following sections:
4.9.2.1
4.9.2.2
4.8.5
4.8.6
4.8.7
4.8.8
8.3

AC mains voltage variation


DC mains voltage variation
Dry heat (non condensing)
Cold
Damp heat, cyclic (condensing)
Random vibration

Printing devices

When the printing device is tested separately from the measuring system, or the simulator, the
measuring system or simulator shall not be subject to the test conditions. However this may not be
possible where the printing device is an integral device.
The EUT may consist solely of a printing device, or of a measuring system connected to a
printing device. During the test the EUT shall be exposed to the specified condition while the
printing device is operating under reference conditions. During tests, the EUT shall be in operation,
simulated inputs (where applicable) are permitted.
The requirements in R117-1, sections: 3.4; 5.2.7 and 5.10.3.1.2 shall be satisfied, as applicable.
8.3.1 Disturbance and Influence factors tests for printing devices (devices not fulfilling the
requirements of 8.1.1)
The classification of the instrument for electrical disturbance tests is given in the first table of
Section 4.9.
The relation between the class and the applicable severity levels is given in the second table of
Section 4.9.
Disturbance tests are as stated in 8.2.1.
Influence factors tests are as stated in 8.2.2.
A measuring system, or simulator, is operated to establish the primary indications, i.e. a quantity
indication and, if applicable, a unit price and price to pay. The EUT shall be in operation during
test(s), and a printout shall be initiated.
The printout of the primary indications provided by the printing device shall be compared with the
indication of measuring system, or simulator, and shall not deviate from (each of) the primary
indications on the measuring instrument, or simulator, by more than one scale interval or the greater
of the two scale intervals if they differ (R117-1, 5.10.1.3). The identification (e.g. time /date) for the
measurement result data shall be printed.
Any value shall be printed as a repeated value from the measuring system or simulator (R117-1,
3.4.7).
Note: printout is continuous during sweep of the frequencies, and is not required at
each frequency.
8.3.2 Tests for Printing Devices Powered by a road vehicle battery not fulfilling the
requirements of 8.1.1
The tests for devices powered from a road vehicle battery are described in Section 4.10.
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 77 of 181

8.3.3

Checking facilities for Printing Devices

At least the following shall be checked:


presence of paper;
transmission of data; and
the electronic control circuits (except the driving circuits of the printing mechanism itself)
to ensure the checking facility, of type I or P, operates correctly.
The test shall ensure that the checking facility of the printing device is functioning by an action that
forces a printing malfunction. This action should be a simulated incorrectness in the generation,
transmission (taking into account R117-2, 4.3.2.1), processing, or indication of measurement data.
Where the action of the checking facility is a warning, this warning shall be given on the ancillary
device concerned or on another visible part of the measuring system.
The requirements in R117-1, 4.3.1.2 shall be satisfied, as applicable.
8.4

Memory Device (e.g. Data Storage Device- DSD)

When the memory device is tested separately the measuring system, or the simulator, shall not be
subject to the test conditions, however this may not be possible if the memory device is an integral
device.
The EUT may consist solely of a memory device, or of a memory device connected to a measuring
system. During the test the EUT shall be exposed to the specified condition while the memory
device is operating under normal atmospheric conditions. During tests, the EUT shall be in
operation, simulated inputs (where applicable) are permitted.
The test shall ensure that the data stored contains all relevant information necessary to reconstruct an
earlier measurement, and be protected against unintentional and intentional changes with common
software tools.
These procedures will only check that the data is stored correctly and given back correctly.
The relevant data which are used for a transaction must be stored automatically.
Note: This requirement means that the storing function must not depend on the decision of
the person operating the system.
The requirements in R117-1, sections: 3.5; 4.3.5; 5.10.1.3; and 5.10.3.1.2 shall be satisfied as
applicable.
8.4.1
Disturbance and Influence factors tests for memory devices not fulfilling the
requirements of 8.1.1
The classification of the instrument for electrical disturbance tests is given in the first table of
Section 4.9.
The relation between the class and the applicable severity levels is given in the second table of
Section 4.9.
Disturbance tests are as stated in 8.2.1.
Influence factors tests are as stated in 8.2.2.
The measuring system, or simulator, is operated to establish the primary indications, i.e. a quantity
indication and, if applicable, a unit price and price to pay. The EUT shall be in operation during
test(s).
It shall be possible to verify that the stored data corresponds to the data provided by the calculator
and that restored data accurately corresponds to stored data.
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 78 of 181

8.4.2 Tests for memory/storage devices not fulfilling the requirements of 8.1.1 powered by a
road vehicle battery
The tests for devices powered from a road vehicle battery are described in Section 4.10.
8.5

Conversion devices

The EUT may consist solely of a conversion device or of a conversion device connected to a
measuring system. During the test the EUT shall be exposed to the specified condition while the
conversion device is operating under normal atmospheric conditions. During tests, the EUT shall be
in operation, simulated inputs (where applicable) are permitted.
Test procedures for conversion devices that are a separate part of a complete measuring system are
described in 6.3.2
When the conversion device is tested separately the measuring system, or the simulator, shall not be
subject to the test conditions. However this may not be possible if the conversion device is an
integral device, in which case section 6.3.1 applies.
The requirements in R117-1, sections: 2.7.1; 2.7.2, 2.9.2, 3.1.10.3, 4.3.5, 5.10.1.3, 5.10.3.1.2
shall be satisfied as applicable.
8.5.1 Accuracy tests for digital conversions devices not fulfilling the requirements of 8.1.1,
and analoque conversion devices
The accuracy tests for the conversion device as separate part of a complete measuring System are
described in section 6.3.2 Second approach.
8.5.2 Disturbance and Influence factors tests for digital conversions devices not fulfilling the
requirements of 8.1.1, and analog conversion devices
The classification of the instrument for electrical disturbance tests is given in the first table of
Section 4.9.
The relation between the class and the applicable severity levels is given in the second table of
Section 4.9.
The Influence factors tests for the First approach are as stated in section 6.3.1.2.
The Disturbance tests for the First approach are as stated in section 6.3.1.3.
The Influence factors tests for the Second approach are as stated in section 6.3.1.2.
The Disturbance tests for the Second approach are as stated in section 6.3.1.3.
The measuring system, or simulator, is operated to establish the primary indications, i.e. a quantity
indication and, if applicable, a unit price and price to pay. The EUT shall be in operation during
test(s).
8.5.3 Tests for digital conversions devices not fulfilling the requirements of 8.1.1, and analog
conversion devices powered by a road vehicle battery
The tests for devices powered from a road vehicle battery are described in Section 4.10.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 79 of 181

Annex A
Testing procedures for fuel dispensers (type evaluation)
Immediately following this Annex is Annex A-LPG, a separate annex that includes test
procedures for LPG dispensers (type evaluation).
Test procedures for initial verification for fuel dispensers and LPG dispensers are not yet
complete; drafts of these initial verification test procedures are found in Annex X (Advice and
Suggested Practices).
Temporary Note: a decision to not include initial verification test procedures in the Annexes
of the 2CD of R117-2 was made at a Project Group meeting in Teddington in October 2013.
Instead, these test procedures are planned to be part of the next revision cycle of R117.
Definitions for the purpose of this Annex
(temporary note: these could be moved to the beginning of R117-2 after review):
AUS32 or DEF: special mix of urea and deionised water (see note 1)
Dynamic flow corrected meters: a meter associated with its transducer, where correction factors
linked to flow rate are used to adjust measurement dependently (2 or more factors to optimized the
accuracy curve of the measuring system over the flow rate range)
Measuring standard: generic term to designate the adequate tools (and process) in use to check
accuracy of instrument/meter (see note 2).
Console: an ancillary device control system, not in the scope of the type certification, capable of
setting the unit price to the dispenser and controlling various phases in self-serving mode on petrol
stations (releasing a dispenser, cash-in a dispenser, stop a dispenser, changing price of fuel) using
the communication protocol with the dispenser calculator
Fuel dispensers: are considered as fuel dispensers in this annex all commonly used fuel or liquid
dispensers on petrol stations and also boat or small aircraft dispensers, when operation of these is
done hose full. Also considered as similar -- any dispenser for foaming liquid working in a
similar way with hose full technique.
Notes:
1) AUS32 or DEF: Diesel Exhaust Fluid is urea at 32% in water, a post-combustion
injection liquid used on some engines to reduce NOx in exhaust. This liquid is not a fuel, but
is considered as a liquid other than water, and is distributed on petrol stations along with
diesel fuel. Refer to ISO22241 for more details.

Special care shall be taken


- when handling AUS32. Refer to health and safety documentation.
when fluid dries or freezes below -11C (possible crystallization starting at -5C)
2) If accuracy tests are performed using a weighing system (ie: using density of test liquid
and checking temperature), special care shall be taken to establish relevant uncertainty
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 80 of 181

calculations, and take in consideration the weight of vapours expelled from the test container
during fills, and uncertainty on such (see also OIML R120 for additional information). To
make this annex easier to read, the expression measuring standard is used to designate
the calibration means put into use to conduct accuracy tests, whatever those means are. It is
understood that the measuring standard is pre-conditioning properly before any use (ie:
any action to wet, prepare in temperature or other, when needed and/or relevant). Refer to
relevant OIML publications for uncertainty assessment and calculation.

A.1

General Information

Test procedures in Annex A are applicable for fuel dispensers, including AUS32/Diesel Exhaust Fluid
(DEF) and blend dispensers. General requirements for the type approval of a complete measuring
system are given in Section 6.1.10 of R117-1.
Immediately following this Annex is Annex A-LPG: a separate annex for test procedures for LPG
dispensers.
The type approval of a dispenser consists of:
(1) Approving the entire system, and
(2) Verifying that the constituent elements (which have not received separate test reports/type
approvals), are compatible and satisfy the applicable requirements.
Appropriate testing procedures for the type approval of a dispenser shall be determined after a full
review and consideration of the test reports/type approvals already granted for the constituent
elements of the measuring system.
When the constituent elements have not been tested separately nor having received separate type
approval, all the tests provided in Sections 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 shall be performed.
When the various constituent elements have all been tested or approved separately, it may be
possible to forego type approval testing with a full review of previously-issued type approval
documentation/drawings of the constituent elements. In this case, it may be appropriate to perform
an accuracy tests on the complete measuring system due to the possible influence of hose or
hydraulic conditions.
Before conducting type approval tests, it is necessary to execute a design evaluation of the dispenser
by using the general check-list provided in OIML R117-3.
A.2

Testing procedures for meters

Testing is completed in accordance with R117-2 Section 5. These tests include:


Accuracy tests (see Section 5.3)
Tests on the MMQ (with maximum specified hose length if applicable) (see Section
5.5)
Endurance testing (see section 5.4
Verification of reverse flow prevention
For the reverse flow prevention, during meter testing, systems which are designed to account for
reverse flow shall be assessed, and test results shall be recorded in the type approval file (description
of solution, e.g.: combination of non-return valve and/or reverse pulse counting).
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 81 of 181

Note: The purpose of clause 2.13.4 of R117-1 is to ensure that reversal flow cannot influence
the next transaction when the system is repressurized. This function is often accomplished
with a non-return valve. Such a system requires a pressure limiting device to avoid hose or
piping rupture. Modern solutions could also utilize reverse pulse counting during idle time
of the system, so repressurization does not result in errors greater than the minimum
specified quantity deviation.
Note: See Section X.A.2 for additional advice and best practices.
A.3

Testing procedures for electronic devices: calculator, correction, indicating, and


associated devices

Testing is completed in accordance with Section 6.


A.4

Testing procedures for gas elimination

Testing is completed in accordance with OIML R117-2 Section 7.


If the measuring system is not fitted with a gas elimination device, the requirements of R117-1
Sections 2.10 and 5.1.3 shall be fulfilled. All measurements must start with the air inlet closed, and
the hose full and pressurized. All measurements must finish with air inlet closed and hose
pressurized. (See also Section 7.2.2.1.1 of OIML R117-2.)
Note: typically submerged pump systems are not fitted with a gas elimination device.
A.5

Testing procedures for ancillary devices

Testing is completed in accordance with Section 8.


A.6

Additional testing procedures for complete fuel dispensers

A.6.1

General requirements

a) All tests to be performed with maximum hose length, hose uncoiled.


b) All tests to be done on a complete dispenser.
c) If remote nozzle arrangement is part of the type evaluation request (secondary transfer point,
usually used on High Speed Truck lines), testing shall confirm that requirements of OIML
R117-1 section 5.1.7 are fulfilled.
A.6.2
Testing procedure related to flow interruption with maximum specified hose
length Only when mechanical calculator is used
A.6.2.1

Purpose of the test

To determine effect of sudden pressure variations and flow interruptions on the accuracy of
dispensers built with mechanical calculators (applicable MPE is R117-1, Table 2, Line A).
A.6.2.2

Test procedure

The interruption test shall be performed three times at the maximum flowrate of the fuel dispenser.
The test volume shall be comprised between 50% and 100% of volume delivered in one minute at
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 82 of 181

Qmax. Using the nozzle, the liquid flow is started and stopped abruptly five times during the same
measurement. These stops shall be made at various time intervals. Results are compared to
reference test of meter over similar volume.
A.6.3

Testing procedures related to fuel dispenser hoses

A.6.3.1

General

Hoses do not receive separate type approval (except in some countries where testing is left to
national authorities); however, all systems shall fulfil the hose-related requirements of R117-1
2.15. The hose dilation shall be less than the allowed hidden quantity. Testing advice on a
procedure for a test on hose dilation can be found in the advice Annex X (see also 5.1.14, 6.2.2.1,
and B.6.1.10 in R117-1)
A.6.3.2

Testing procedures related to fuel dispenser hoses - Details

This test is to check that dilation of the maximum specified hose length does not exceed
requirements of R117-1 : 2.15
a) disable hiding of increments at beginning of delivery (see R117-1 : 5.1.14) (note: action
needed at calculator of instrument)
b) If needed (hose reel present), uncoil hose without starting pump nor pressurizing hose (note:
can be done by keeping nozzle boot switch activated)
c) Activate pump (pressurize hose) and read display change over first 10 seconds (note: can be
done by activating nozzle boot switch) record result. Display change corresponds to hose
dilation. Check against MPE in R117-1, Section 2.15, and record result and whether a hose
reel is present or not.
d) For vapor recovery hose: In accordance with R117-1, Section 2.18.2 any means to
prevent/detect such leak above MPE limits shall be described in type approval file.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 83 of 181

A.6.4

Other fuel dispenser functionality to be tested:

A.6.4.1

Functional test of communication protocols.

A.6.4.1.1 Test correct communication and retrieving of calculator transaction data with a connected
console/POS (when applicable and supplied by manufacturer).
A.6.4.1.2 Test dispenser not accepting new transaction if communication link lost during ongoing
transaction:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)

Connect dispenser to a console/POS.


Make sure the dispenser mode is manual authorize from console/POS.
Initiate and start a transaction.
While transaction is ongoing, disconnect link between console and dispenser.
Hang nozzle record display indication.
Lift nozzle and check that no further transaction is authorized.
Hang nozzle and check that display still indicates same as last transaction (as per record).

A.6.4.1.3
Functional test of communication protocols do be done with SSD or console, over
remote price change (see R117-1 : 3.3.2.1)
a) Authorization for transaction: program console/POS to not free dispenser automatically.
b) Price (if applicable): program product price for dispenser under test.
c) Lift nozzle: nothing shall happen, except price per unit update according to lifted nozzle (see
note).
d) Free dispenser at console/POS.
e) Dispenser calculator shall enter autotest/reset sequence to start transaction.
f) Dispenser display shall display Volume = zero and Price to pay = zero, while price per unit
of volume displays the product price that was previously set.
g) From the console, try to change the price of product. It shall not affect the display of the
dispenser.
h) Flow some volume in a test can.
i) Hang the nozzle.
j) Display shall remain with same price per unit of volume as set prior to the transaction.
k) At console/POS, carry out usual cash in steps for the dispenser. Display of dispenser shall
either
Not change and retain last transaction information; or
Zero volume and price to pay, and display new price per unit of volume.
Note: OIML R117-1 clause 3.3.2.1 A time of at least 5 seconds shall elapse between
indicating a new unit price and before the next measurement operation can start, if the unit
price is set from ancillary devices.
A.6.4.2

Electronic calibration (Check influence of electronic calibration system)

a) Adjust the meter as close as possible to zero setting and record accuracy test result.
b) Change adjustment by 0.5% using the electronic calibration system (and record need to break
any physical seal).
c) Check result versus accuracy test result of a) (expect change of +0.5% +/- 0.1%).
d) Change adjustment back to normal (by -0.5%) by using electronic calibration system.
e) Check result versus accuracy test result of a) (expect result back to 0 +/- 0.1%).
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 84 of 181

f) If no physical seal was broken (point b), check electronic log for evidence of both adjustment
actions done in b) and d).
g) Record all results.
A.6.4.3

Qmin

a) Lift the nozzle, and start a simulated transaction to set flow rate to Qmin using control valve
(note: such control valve could be placed between hose and nozzle).
b) Stop flow and hang nozzle.
c) Lift nozzle, check reset of display.
d) Perform the accuracy test while checking real flow rate during test.
e) Record the result.
A.6.4.4

Qmax

a) Lift the nozzle, and start a simulated transaction to set flowrate to Qmax using the control
valve (note: such control valve could be placed between hose and nozzle).
b) Stop flow and hang the nozzle.
c) Lift nozzle, check reset of display.
d) Perform the accuracy test while checking real flowrate during test.
e) Record the result.
A.6.4.5

MMQ

a) Lift the nozzle, check reset of display. Open the control valve at maximum (note: such
control valve could be placed between hose and nozzle).
b) Perform the accuracy test at highest achievable flowrate (note: achievable means with no
spillage).
c) Record the result.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 85 of 181

A.6.4.6

Temperature conversion (if applicable)

General
Temperature compensation when applicable (measurement, probe position, see clauses of OIML
R117-2: 6.3, and OIML R117-1: 6.1.10 note 3). Testing shall be done in accordance with Chapter 6.
Note: See also Annex X.6.4.6 for advice and best practices.
A.6.4.7

Test of the timeout function

Note: only applies to dispensers with electronic indicators see R117-1 section 5.1.15.
a) Lift the nozzle to activate the dispenser.
b) Do not deliver fuel wait for timeout.
c) Check that dispenser switches off and terminates transaction within a period not greater than
120s.
d) Hang the nozzle for 5 seconds.
e) Lift the nozzle to activate the dispenser.
f) Deliver a quantity of fuel into receptacle.
g) Stop flow and note time.
h) Check that the dispenser switches off and terminates the transaction within a period not
greater than 120s.
i) Hang the nozzle.
j) Record the result of test of c) and h).
A.6.5

Blender testing see R117-1: 5.9

A.6.5.1

Blending gasoline/gasoline

Check that the dispenser allows for individual accuracy check of each meter that contributes to the
blending.
A.6.5.2

Blending gasoline/oil or blending gasoline or diesel with additives

A.6.5.2.1

Oil or additive injected upstream of meter

In this case, oil is measured with the volume of gasoline, and accuracy shall meet MPE requirements
at all ratios of mix. If oil/additive can use more than one blend ratio, the tests shall be done at
minimum, maximum, and middle ratio of mix.
The oil or additive contribution shall be controlled only if ratio accuracy is to be controlled (see
OIML R117-1 clause 5.9.3)

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 86 of 181

1) Special means shall be provided in the dispenser to route oil to a special sampling point
where the oil volume to be injected is collected and volume measured for test purposes.
2) Sampling point shall be capable of being sealed to prevent fraud.

A.6.5.2.2

Oil or additive injected downstream of meter

In this case, oil is not measured with the volume of gasoline, and old mix/injection shall be disabled
to perform the accuracy test. The accuracy test shall meet MPE requirements.
Note: contribution/volume of oil injected can be checked as additional volume dispensed
when oil injection is enabled.
Oil or additive contribution shall be controlled only if ratio accuracy is to be controlled (see OIML
R117-1 clause 5.9.3).
A.6.5.2.2.1 Software alternative: Special adjustment menus needed in the calculator procedure
to be provided by manufacturer.
a) Test 1 - Disengage oil/additive blend for accuracy test purpose (fuel only) and carry out an
accuracy test at Qmax.
b) Test 2- Engage oil/additive blend at maximum ratio for accuracy test purpose with no
correction (ie: oil is injected downstream of the meter but the calculator does not compensate
for the volume of oil injected). Carry out an accuracy test at the same Qmax and with the same
volume as Test 1.
c) Calculate the difference between test 1 and test 2. The difference is the oil/additive
contribution and check versus indicated blend (see R117-1 section 5.9.5 if applicable)
A.6.5.2.2.2 Physical alternative: special accuracy test process to physically disconnect oil
injection and measure it separately procedure to be provided by manufacturer .

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 87 of 181

Annex A-LPG
Testing procedures for LPG dispensers (type evaluation)
Definitions for the purpose of this Annex
(temporary note: these could be moved to the beginning of R117-2 after review):
Dynamic flow corrected meters: a meter associated with its transducer, where correction factors
linked to flow rate are used to adjust measurement dependently (2 or more factors to optimized the
accuracy curve of the measuring system over the flow rate range)
Measuring standard: generic term to designate the adequate tools (and process) in use to check
accuracy of instrument/meter (see note 2). Special care shall be taken to properly assess the ratio of the
mix of Butane and Propane in use for any test if it can influence accuracy of measuring standards.
Console: an ancillary device control system, not in the scope of the type certification, capable of
setting the unit price to the dispenser and controlling various phases in self-serving mode on petrol
stations (releasing a dispenser, cash-in a dispenser, stop a dispenser, changing price of LPG fuel)
using the communication protocol with the dispenser calculator
LPG dispenser: are considered as LPG dispensers in this annex all commonly used fuel or liquid
dispensers where liquid has a saturating vapor pressure above atmospheric pressure at ambient
temperature (example is DMF). This included equipment on petrol stations and also used to feed
boat or small aircraft, when operation of these is done hose full.
A-L.1

General Information

Test procedures in Annex A-L are applicable for LPG fuel dispensers. General requirements for the
type approval of a complete measuring system are given in Section 6.1.10 of R117-1.
The type approval of a LPG dispenser consists of:
(1) Approving the entire system, and
(2) Verifying that the constituent elements (which have not received separate test reports/type
approvals), are compatible and satisfy the applicable requirements.
Appropriate testing procedures for the type approval of an LPG dispenser shall be determined after a
full review and consideration of the test reports/type approvals already granted for the constituent
elements of the measuring system.
When the constituent elements have not been tested separately nor having received separate type
approval, all the tests provided in Sections 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 shall be performed.
When the various constituent elements have all been tested or approved separately, it may be
possible to forego type approval testing with a full review of previously-issued type approval
documentation/drawings of the constituent elements. In this case, it may be appropriate to perform
accuracy tests on the complete measuring system due to the possible influence of hose or hydraulic
conditions.
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 88 of 181

Before conducting type approval tests, it is necessary to execute a design evaluation of the LPG
dispenser by using the general check-list provided in OIML R117-3.
Note: Special care shall be taken when handling LPG fuel as it can cause severe burns by
evaporation.
A-L.2 Testing procedures for meters
Preamble note: testing of separate calculator prior to meter testing can be required to use such
calculator and associated transducer during meter testing. See A.3
Testing is completed in accordance with Section 5. These tests include:
A-L.2.1

Accuracy tests

a) Determine Qmin and Qmax for associated viscosity/defined fluid to be measured. It is


assumed that any mix of Butane/Propane is similar to LPG even if the usual specification
for such fuel is a mix between 30/70% and 70/30% of these two constituents.
b) Put the meter on the test rig as per manufacturers specifications, see OIML R117-2
section 5.1. The test rig might include a pump, associated piping, feeding tank, control
valves, hose and nozzle. None of these parts shall interfere with the performance of the
meter under test. If the test rig is provided by the manufacturer, it shall be capable of
ensuring that no air or vapor is fed to the meter during testing (no cavitation).
c) Adjust meter to closest zero setting at highest applicable flow rate for approval (or at
least 80% of such value as per requirement of manufacturer).
d) If more than one adjustment point is needed, refer to the manufacturers adjustment
procedure (ie: in case of multipoint adjustment curve for dynamic adjustment).
e) Secure adjustment setting; it shall remain unchanged for A-L.2.1.7, A-L.2.2 and AL.2.3. Any change to the adjustment settings of meter before the end of tests related to
section A-L.2.3 will invalidate test results related to section A-L.2.1.7, A-L.2.2 and AL.2.3. Securing the adjustment setting shall be achieved with adequate seals or isolation
of the EUT in a room/building until tests related to section A-L.2.3 are finished.
f) Establish the list of flowrates to be tested as per OIML R117-2 section 5.3.2.1.
g) Carry out the test for each flowrate (see 5.3.2.1) and record the accuracy test results. All
results shall be within applicable MPE.
h) Repeat g) at the limits of operation as per OIML R117-2 clause 5.3.3.
i) If applicable, repeat g) with different disturbances as per OIML R117-2 clause 5.3.4.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 89 of 181

A-L.2.2 Tests on the MMQ (with maximum specified hose length if applicable) ;
a) Confirm adequate hose arrangement for type evaluation Flush hose for 3 minutes with
continuous flow to remove any remaining air bubbles.
b) Activate the pumping system to pressurize instrument/meter.
c) Stop the pump leave idle for 1 minute.
d) Reset the indication, activate pump, pressurize instrument/meter and deliver a quantity
equal to MMQ into the measuring standard at the maximum achievable flow rate.
e) Record the accuracy test result. The result shall be within applicable MPE for MMQ as
per clause 2.5.1 of OIML R117-1.
f) Repeat steps b) to e) two more times.

A-L.2.3 Endurance testing - see OIML R117-2 section 5.4


If more than one fuel (or extended viscosity range required), the endurance test and related accuracy
tests shall be conducted with a fluid having a low viscosity / low lubrication capacity in the viscosity
range requested by manufacturer.
A-L.2.4 Check of reverse flow prevention
During meter testing, systems which are designed to cope with reverse flow shall be assessed, and
recorded in the type evaluation file (a description of solution shall be recorded, e.g.: combination of
non-return valve and/or reverse pulse counting).
The manufacturer shall provide test method to demonstrate that design copes with reverse flow. Test
shall be conducted and result recorded.
Note on OIML R117-1 - 2.13.4:
2.13.4 When reversal of the flow could result in errors greater than the minimum specified
quantity deviation, a measuring system (in which the liquid could flow in the opposite
direction
when the pump is stopped) shall be provided with a non-return valve. If necessary, the
system shall also be fitted with a pressure limiting device
It is the purpose of this clause in R117-1 to make sure that reversal flow cannot influence the
next transaction when the system gets repressurized achieving such function with a nonreturn valve. But such a system requires a pressure limiting device to avoid hose or piping to
burst open in case of heat overpressure on the hose (sun radiation) or hose overrun. A
modern solution can also imply reverse pulse counting during idle time of system, so
repressurizing does not result in errors greater than the minimum specified quantity
deviation.
A-L.3 Testing procedures for electronic devices: calculator, correction, indicating, and
associated devices
Testing is completed in accordance with Section 6.
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 90 of 181

A-L.4

Testing procedures for gas elimination

Testing is completed in accordance with OIML R117-2 Section 7.


If the measuring system is not fitted with a gas elimination device, the requirements of R117-1
Sections 2.10 and 5.1.3 shall be fulfilled. All measurements must start with hose full and
pressurized. All measurements must finish with hose pressurized. Apply 7.2.2.1.1 of OIML R117-2
Requirements on MPE for gas elimination are in OIML R117-1 section 2.10.1
A-L.5 Testing procedures for ancillary devices
Testing is completed in accordance with Section 8.

A-L.6 Additional testing procedures for complete LPG dispensers


A-L.6.1 General requirements
a) All tests shall be performed with maximum hose length, hose uncoiled.
b) All tests shall be performed on the complete dispenser.
c) If the remote nozzle arrangement is part of the type evaluation request (secondary transfer
point, usually used on High Speed Truck lines but also possible for dual nozzle arrangement
dispenser), testing shall confirm that requirements of OIML R117-1 section 5.5.5 are
fulfilled.
A-L.6.2
Testing procedure related to flow interruption with maximum specified hose
length Only when mechanical calculator is used
A-L.6.2.1

Purpose of the test

To determine effect of sudden pressure variations and flow interruptions on the accuracy of LPG
dispensers built with mechanical calculators (applicable MPE is R117-1, Table 2, Line A).
A-L.6.2.2

Test procedure

The interruption test shall be performed three times at the maximum flowrate of the LPG dispenser.
The test volume shall be comprised between 50% and 100% of volume delivered in one minute at
Qmax. Using the dead man push button or any internal valve arrangement in the EUT, the liquid
flow is started and stopped abruptly five times during the same measurement. These stops shall be
made at various time intervals. Results are compared to the reference test of the meter over similar
volume.

A-L.6.3

Testing procedures related to LPG dispenser hoses

A-L.6.3.1

General

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 91 of 181

Hoses do not receive separate type approval (except in some countries where testing is required by
national authorities); however, all systems shall fulfil the hose-related requirements of R117-1
2.15. The hose dilation and vaporization quantity shall be less than the allowed hidden quantity.
Testing advice on a procedure for a test on hose dilation can be found in the advice Annex X.A.6.2
(see also 5.1.14, 6.2.2.1, and B.6.1.10 in R117-1)

A-L.6.3.2

Testing procedures related to LPG dispenser hoses - Details

This test is to check that dilation of the maximum specified hose length does not exceed
requirements of R117-1 Section 2.15
a) disable the hiding of increments at the beginning of the delivery (see R117-1 : 5.1.14) (note:
action needed at calculator of instrument)
b) If needed (hose reel present), uncoil the hose without starting pump nor pressurizing hose
(note: this can be done by keeping nozzle boot switch activated)
c) Activate pump (pressurize hose) and read display change over first 10 seconds (note: can be
done by activating nozzle boot switch) record result. Display change corresponds to hose
dilation. Check against MPE in R117-1, Section 2.15, and record the result and whether or
not a hose reel is present. (see warning, below)

Note: on LPG dispensers, controlling the flow (and stopping the flow when desired) may
require some training and/or some special arrangement (ie: valve between nozzle and hose
to stop flow without disconnecting the safety coupling from the measuring standard).
Warning: when pressurizing the hose, special care shall be taken with nozzle (as it is not
connected to a vehicle). Pressure might create leaks and/or a hazardous situation with
nozzle/hose movements.
A-L.6.4

Other LPG dispenser functionality to be tested:

A-L.6.4.1

Functional test of communication protocols

A-L.6.4.1.1 Test correct communication and retrieving of calculator transaction data with a
connected console/POS (when applicable and supplied by manufacturer)
A-L.6.4.1.2 Test LPG dispenser not accepting a new transaction if communication link lost
during ongoing transaction.
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)

Connect the dispenser to a console/POS.


Make sure the dispenser mode is manual authorize from console/POS.
Initiate and start a transaction.
While the transaction is ongoing, disconnect link between console and dispenser.
Hang nozzle record display indication.
Lift nozzle and check that no further transaction is authorized.
Hang the nozzle and check that display still indicates same as last transaction (as per
record).

A-L.6.4.1.3 Functional test of communication protocols to be done with SSD or console, over
remote price change (see R117-1 : 3.3.2.1)
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 92 of 181

a) Authorization for transaction: program console/POS to not free dispenser automatically.


b) Price (if applicable): program product price for dispenser under test.
c) Lift nozzle: nothing shall happen, except price per unit update according to lifted nozzle
(see note).
d) Free dispenser at console/POS.
e) Dispenser calculator shall enter autotest/reset sequence to start transaction.
f) Dispenser display shall display Volume = zero and Price to pay = zero, while price per
unit of volume displays the product price that was set priory.
g) From the console, try to change price of product. It shall not affect display of dispenser.
h) Flow some volume into a test can.
i) Hang the nozzle.
j) The display shall remain with same price per unit of volume as set priory to transaction.
k) At console/POS, carry out usual cash in steps for the dispenser. Display of dispenser
shall either:
Not change and retain last transaction information; or
Zero volume and price to pay, and display new price per unit of volume.
Note: OIML R117-1 clause 3.3.2.1 A time of at least 5 seconds shall elapse between
indicating a new unit price and before the next measurement operation can start, if the unit
price is set from ancillary devices.
A-L.6.4.2

Electronic calibration (Check influence of electronic calibration system)

a) Adjust meter as close as possible to zero setting and record accuracy test result.
b) Change the adjustment by 1% using electronic calibration system (and record need to
break any physical seal).
c) Check result versus accuracy test result of a) (expect change of +1% +/- 0.2%).
d) Change adjustment back to normal (by -1%) by using electronic calibration system.
e) Check result versus accuracy test result of a) (expect result back to 0 +/- 0.2%).
f) if no physical seal was broken (point b), check electronic log for evidence of both
adjustment actions done in b) and d).
g) Record all results.
A-L.6.4.3

Qmin

a) Lift the nozzle, and start a simulated transaction to set flow rate to Qmin using the control
valve (such control valve shall be placed between hose and nozzle).
b) Stop the flow and hang the nozzle.
c) Lift the nozzle, check reset of display.
d) Do accuracy test while checking real flow rate during test.
e) Record the result.
A-L.6.4.4

Qmax

a) Lift the nozzle, and start a simulated transaction to set flowrate to Qmax using the control
valve (such control valve shall be placed between hose and nozzle).
b) Stop flow and hang the nozzle.
c) Lift the nozzle, check the reset of the display.
d) Do accuracy test while checking real flowrate during test.
e) Record the result
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 93 of 181

A-L.6.4.5

MMQ

a) Lift the nozzle, check reset of display. Open the control valve at maximum (such control
valve shall be placed between hose and nozzle).
b) Do the accuracy test at the highest achievable flowrate (note: achievable means with no
spillage and as per measuring standard arrangement capacity).
c) Record the result.
A-L.6.4.6

Temperature conversion (if applicable)

A-L.6.4.6.1

General

Temperature compensation when applicable (measurement, probe position, see clauses of OIML
R117-2: 6.3, and OIML R117-1 : 6.1.10 note 3)
A-L.6.4.6.2 Method 1: use of a measuring standard capable of correcting also for temperature at
final reading (as resulting temperature in a readable information with some measuring standards
such as proving cans, with probe sensing LPG temperature in the middle of the volume of liquid).
a) Definition of MPEC (Maximum permissible error with correction). MPEC is the addition of
applicable line A or B of table 2 of OIML R117-1 and line C for the applicable class
(example: if EUT is full LPG measuring system under class 1, MPE is 1% (line A) and
conversion extra MPE is 0.4% (line C) as per OIML R117-1 clause 2.7.1.2)
b) Use 2 storage tanks of the same LPG fuel, each at a different temperature. Tank 1 shall be
cold, tank 2 shall be warm. The temperature difference between tank 1 and tank 2 shall be at
least 10C. The length of connection piping from tanks to EUT shall be minimal.
c) Pre-condition the measuring standard on tank 1. Adjust meter closest to the zero setting.
d) Execute accuracy test on tank 1. Volume of test shall be at least 2xMMQ + volume of piping
and no more than 4xMMQ + volume of piping from tank to EUT. Record result. Result shall
be within MPEC.
e) Switch EUT to tank 2. Do not flow liquid from tank 2 unless it is for the next accuracy test.
f) Execute accuracy test on tank 2. Volume of test shall be at least 2xMMQ + volume of piping
and no more than 4xMMQ + volume of piping from tank to EUT Record result. Result shall
be within MPEC.
g) Switch EUT to tank 1. Do not flow liquid from tank 2 unless it is for the next accuracy test.
h) Execute accuracy test on tank 1. Volume of test shall be at least 2xMMQ + volume of piping
and no more than 4xMMQ + volume of piping from tank to EUT Record result. Result shall
be within MPEC.
i) When applicable, check correction table of calculator (or checksum signature when
applicable) and record.
Notes:
- The purpose of this Method 1 process is to check global response of Temperature
conversion, using measurement standards capable of correcting result with final
temperature of transferred LPG fuel. As these means might not be easy to deploy for
testing, method 2 allows for split verification for type approval purposes.
- Special safety precautions shall be in use to prevent LPG hazard when heating.
A-L.6.4.6.3

Method 2: split EUT verification for type approval

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 94 of 181

Note: These tests can be done with a low hazard fuel such as mineral spirit.
a)
b)
c)
d)

e)

f)

g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
m)

EUT arrangement shall be with a very short hose.


Install reference probe (1) at EUT temperature well.
Install reference probe (2) at EUT nozzle spout tip.
Disengage temperature correction of EUT (note: refer to manufacturers manual as this
might be the way to have maintenance information displayed on EUT dial such as
temperature of fuel at EUT conversion probe).
Run flow through the EUT at Qmax from the storage tank for at least 3 minutes to stabilize
fluid temperature and EUT temperature (outgoing flow can be re-circulated back to the
storage tank).
Check accurate temperature reading by comparing temperature indicated by the EUT
(converted signal from its own temperature probe) with reference probe (1) inserted in the
temperature well close to instrument meter/transducer. Maximum difference allowed is 1.3
C (equivalent to 0.4% - line C of table 2 of OIML R117-1 for LPG fuel).
Warm up the storage tank by 10C minimum from actual temperature.
Read Probe (1) = PT0, and temperature indicated by EUT = PTS.
Initiate flow at Qmax and start stopwatch simultaneously.
After 15s (+/- 1 second), read Probe (1) = PT1, probe (2)=PT2 and temperature indicated by
EUT = PTI.
Stop flow.
If difference between PT2 and PT1 is greater than 1C, redo test or re-assess test situation.
(PTS-PTI) shall be greater than 90% of (PT1-PT0).
Note: testing of f) and i) can be arranged outside of the EUT by using a reference bath to
compare the EUT probe reading and the reference probe reading. Such an arrangement also
allows the full range of temperature to be covered.

A-L.6.4.7

Test of timeout function

Note: only applies to LPG dispensers with electronic indicators see R117-1 section 5.1.15
a) Lift nozzle to activate dispenser.
b) Do not deliver LPG wait for timeout.
c) Check that dispenser switches off and terminates transaction within a period not greater
than 120s.
d) Hang nozzle for 5 seconds.
e) Lift nozzle to activate dispenser.
f) Deliver a quantity of LPG into receiving vessel or back to storage tank.
g) Stop flow and note time.
h) Check that dispenser switches off and terminates transaction within a period not greater
than 120s.
i) Hang the nozzle.
j) Record the result of test of c) and h).
A-L.6.4.8

LPG remaining liquid in measuring system (OIML R117-1 clause 5.5.2)

A-L.6.4.8.1

General

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 95 of 181

A stream of LPG under gaseous form is created inside the dispenser by the air separator and sent
back to the storage tank. This stream of gas is used as a saturating pressure reference. Liquid
pressure inside the measuring system shall remain above such reference with a safety factor (eg: 1
bar safety). For testing, the gas pressure reference (PG) shall be read as it is fed to the pressure
maintaining device (see OIML R117-1 5.5.3 second paragraph). Liquid pressure (PL) shall be read
after measuring system, downstream pressure maintaining device.
A-L.6.4.8.2 Test
a) Lift the nozzle to activate dispenser and connect to tank return line.
b) Read pressure of liquid PL0 and gas phases PG0. PL0 shall be greater than PG0 by at least 1
bar
c) Start flow (activate dead man push button if needed).
d) Read pressure of liquid PL1 and gas phases PG1. PL1 shall remain greater than PG1 by at
least 1 bar.
e) Close return line of gas from air-separator to storage tank. PG shall be increasing.
f) When PG reaches PL, flow of liquid in the measuring system shall stop by activation of the
pressure maintaining device.
g) Re-open the return line of gas from the air-separator to the storage tank. PG shall decrease,
and flow shall resume (unless flow stop was too long and initiated the time-out function).

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 96 of 181

Annex B
Testing procedures for measuring systems on road tankers
The tests in Annex B apply to measuring systems mounted on road tankers or on transportable tanks
for the transport and delivery of all liquids of low viscosity (less than or equal to 20 mPas) and stored
at atmospheric pressure, with the exception of foaming potable liquids.
Note 1: tankers for potable liquids are covered in R117-2 Annex E, and tankers for liquefied
gasses under pressure will be covered in a future annex.
Note 2: In accordance with Section 2.10.4 of R117-1, higher viscosity liquids may be covered
by Annex B, but are not required to have gas elimination devices fitted. In this case, provision
must be made to prevent the entry of air into the system.

B.1

General Information

Measuring systems on road tankers consist of several constituent elements. These constituent
elements may or may not be subject to a separate type evaluation. According to 6.1.1 of OIML
R117-1, the constituent elements of a measuring system shall comply with the relevant
requirements.
The type evaluation of a measuring system on a road tanker involves verifying that the constituent
elements of the system, which have not been subject to separate type approvals, satisfy the
applicable requirements.
Tests for carrying out the type evaluation of a measuring system on a road tanker shall therefore be
determined on the basis of the type evaluations already granted for the constituent elements.
When none of the constituent elements has been subject to separate type evaluation, all the tests
provided in sections 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 shall be performed.
When all of the various constituent elements have all been evaluated separately, it may be possible
to complete type evaluation of the complete measuring system through an evaluation of system
drawings and a review of the type evaluation tests of the constituent elements.
Before conducting tests, it is necessary to execute the design evaluation of components and pipe
work of the measuring system on a road tanker by using the general check-list given in R117-3 and
the relevant points for road tanker evaluation.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 97 of 181

B.2

Metrological controls and performance tests for type evaluation of the constituent
elements

B.2.1 Testing procedures for meter sensors, measuring devices and meters with
mechanical indicating devices
Testing is completed in accordance with Section 5. These tests include:
Accuracy tests;
Tests on the minimum measured quantity;
Endurance testing; and
Evaluation of the non-return valve configuration and reverse count detection.
B.2.2

Testing procedures for electronic devices: calculator, correction, indicating, and


associated devices
Testing is completed in accordance with Section 6.

B.2.3 Testing procedures for gas elimination devices


Testing is completed in accordance with Section 7.
Note: if the measuring system is not fitted with a gas elimination device, the
requirements of Sections 2.10 and 5.2.3 of R117-1 shall be fulfilled.
B.2.4 Testing procedures for ancillary devices
Testing is completed in accordance with Section 8.
B.3

Metrological controls and performance tests of the complete measuring system

B.3.1 Accuracy test of the complete measuring system


Testing is completed in accordance with Section 5. These tests include:
Accuracy tests at Qmin and the maximum achievable flowrate;
Tests on the minimum measured quantity (with maximum specified hose length);
B.3.2 Complete emptying of the compartment of a road tanker (single compartment
trucks only)
Object of the test
To determine the effect of emptying a compartment of a road tanker during delivery on the accuracy
of the quantity indication.

Test procedure
The test quantity shall be at least the quantity delivered in one minute at the maximum achievable
flowrate , rounded up to the volume of the test measure used.
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 98 of 181

(Qmax is often impossible to achieve if the system has gravity delivery)


A compartment of a road tanker, filled with the volume of the test measure used, is completely
emptied until the delivery stops. The test shall be performed three times at the maximum achievable
flowrate of the measuring system.
1. Using normal operating means, deliver a quantity from the compartment to be used and
allow it to drain until the pipe work is empty and delivery stops by itself.
2. Wet and drain the test measure (if not correctly done after delivering the product in step 1).
3. Close the compartment and fill it with a quantity of product equal to the volume of the test
measure.
4. Reset the indication of the CID.
5. Fill the test measure at Qmax until the delivery is interrupted.
6. Read pt and Tt at 50 % of the test volume.
7. Read Vi, Vs, and Ts.
8. Calculate Vn and Evi.
9. Drain the test measure.
10. Repeat steps 3 to 7 twice, and calculate the mean value v.
11. Fill in test report.
Note: The detection of pt is not necessary in gravity delivery.
B.3.3 Connecting of an empty compartment (multiple compartment trucks only)
Object of the test
To determine the effect of connecting an empty compartment of a road tanker during delivery on the
accuracy of the quantity indication.
Test procedure
The test shall be performed three times at the maximum achievable flowrate of the measuring
system. The test quantity shall be at least the volume delivered in one minute at the maximum
achievable flowrate.
The delivery starts from a filled compartment of the road tanker. After at least one minute, an empty
compartment is connected and the filled compartment is disconnected. After the delivery stops, the
empty compartment is disconnected, the filled compartment is connected and the delivery is
continued until the test measure is filled.
1. Wet and drain the test measure.
2. Reset the indication of the CID.
3. Start the filling procedure of the test measure from the filled compartment at the maximum
achievable flowrate.
4. Read pt and Tt
5. Connect the empty compartment and disconnect the filled compartment.
6. After interruption of the delivery disconnect the empty compartment, connect the filled
compartment and fill the test measure to its nominal volume.
7. Read Vi, Vs, Ts.
8. Calculate Vn and Evi.
9. Drain the test measure.
10. Repeat steps 2 to 9 twice, and calculate the mean value v.
11. Fill in test report
Note: The detection of pt is not necessary in gravity delivery.
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 99 of 181

B.3.4 Variation in the internal volume of the hose (full hose measuring systems only)
Object of the test
To determine the effect of the increase in internal volume of a hose under pressure on the accuracy
of the quantity indication.
General information
The manufacturer may provide information on how the requirement in Section 2.15 of OIML R1171 is fulfilled. It may consist in providing the reference of the hose if it has been used previously in
an approved measuring system or results of tests performed by the manufacturer of the measuring
system or of the hose.
It shall then be verified that the hose is not used in worse conditions (pressure, length) than
previously tested.
If the manufacturer is not able to provide this information, testing is necessary.
A hose is characterized by:
a) Manufacturer;
b) Designation;
c) Inner diameter;
d) Length of the hose;
e) The test report shall further contain data concerning:
Maximum operating pressure of the measuring system; and
Minimum measured quantity of the measuring system.
Test equipment:
Calibrated graduated test measure having a capacity of at least three times the minimum specified
quantity deviation of the measuring system to measure the discharge from the delivery hose of the
road tanker under test.
Note: It may be necessary to use an intermediate receptacle to collect the volume
discharged from the hose before measuring it in the graduated test measure in one or more
measurements. If the standard test measure used for the accuracy tests can be read
accurately enough, this test could be started with the product level in the sight glass on a
graduation mark and the volume of product released during this test could be measured by
the rise in product.
Test procedure:
1. Check that the hose closing device (e.g a nozzle) is fitted with a device that prevents the
draining of the hose (anti-drain device). If the hose closing device is downstream of the antidrain device (see R 117-1 clause 2.13.6), the volume of product between these devices that
will be released when the closing device is opened with the hose not being under pressure,
will need to be considered if the hose dilation test fails.
Note: Where the hose closing device is downstream of the anti-drain device the volume
between these devices should be less than the minimum specified quantity deviation (see R
117-1 clause 2.13.6) and if the actual volume is
unknown it will need to be determined
and subtracted from the volume
released during the hose dilation test if this test fails.
2. Wet the test measure.
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 100 of 181

3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Completely uncoil hose from the hose reel or its normal storage position.
Deliver a quantity of product and abruptly stop the delivery by using the hose closing device.
Close valves upstream of the hose and switch off the pump.
Coil the hose completely onto the hose reel or into is normal storage position.
Using the hose closing device, drain the hose into the test measure and determine the volume
of product that is released.
8. Check that the quantity released does not exceed the minimum specified quantity deviation
(see 2.15) when not fitted with a hose reel, or twice the minimum specified quantity
deviation when fitted with a hose reel. If the hose closing device is downstream of the antidrain device and the volume in the test measure is greater than the allowed volume,
determine the volume retained between the hose closing device and the anti-drain device and
subtract this from the volume of product released in step 7.
9. Repeat steps 2 to 8 twice, and calculate the mean value v.
10. Fill in test report.
B.3.5 Complete emptying of the hose (empty hose measuring system only)
Object of the test
To determine the effect of the repeatability of the complete emptying of the hose by using additional
devices or by gravity on the accuracy of the quantity indication.

Test procedure
The test shall be performed three times at a flowrate within the flowrate range of the measuring
system. The test quantity shall be the minimum measured quantity. Information on the complete
emptying procedure shall be fully documented in the test report.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Wet and drain the test measure.


Reset the indication of the CID.
Deliver a quantity equal to the volume of the test measure.
Read pt and Tt at 50 % of the test volume.
Empty the hose in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
Read Vi, Vs, and Ts.
Calculate Vn and Evi.
Drain the test measure.
Repeat steps 2 to 8 twice, and calculate the mean value v.
Fill in test report.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 101 of 181

Annex E
Test procedures for measuring systems (MS) for milk, beer and other
foaming potable liquids (see R117-1, Section 5.6)
The tests in Annex E apply to measuring systems on road tankers and also to fixed measuring systems
that are used for the reception or the delivery of milk, beer and other foaming potable liquids.
Note: fixed is interpreted here as either fixed to a certain location or installed as a package
which can be transported.

E.1 General Information


(As valid generally and not only for Annex E), the measuring systems (MS) consist of several
constituent elements. These constituent elements may or may not be subject to a separate type
approval. According to 6.1.1 of OIML R117-1, the constituent elements of a measuring system shall
comply with the relevant requirements.
The type approval of the measuring system involves verifying that the constituent elements of the
system, which have not been subject to separate type approvals, satisfy the applicable requirements.
Tests for carrying out the type approval of the measuring system shall therefore be determined on
the basis of the type approvals already granted for the constituent elements.
When none of the constituent elements has been subject to separate type approval, all tests provided
in E.2 to E.7 shall be performed.
When the various constituent elements are all approved separately, it may be possible to replace type
approval based on tests by type approval of drawings of the constituent elements. This possibility
has to be considered cautiously and it may be appropriate even if in this case to perform an accuracy
test on the complete measuring system due to the possible influence of hydraulic conditions on the
accuracy of the complete system.
Additionally, it shall be safeguarded for milk measuring systems, that when the air elimination device
has been approved separately, the tests have been performed with milk.)
Before conducting tests, it is necessary to perform the design examination of the MS by using the
general check-list given in R117-3 and the relevant points for such MS approval.

E.2 Tests for meter sensors, measuring devices and meters with mechanical indicating devices
For the electronic devices (calculator, conversion device, indicating device, associated devices) tests
additional to E.2 apply, see clause E.3.
Tests are performed in accordance with R117-2, section 5.
Tests shall be performed on a test bench, when the flowrate in the MS is not settable.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 102 of 181

The tests consist of:


a) Accuracy tests:
Accuracy tests at metering conditions:
i.
EUT for milk: tests shall be performed either with milk or with a liquid of a viscosity similar
to milk (e.g. water);
metering conditions: same as the typical operating conditions of the MS in use (i.e. temperature
range approximately 1 15 C, pressure range approximately 1 5 bar).
ii.
EUT for beer and other foaming liquids: tests shall be performed either with the liquid for
the intended use or with a substitute with a viscosity similar to the liquid for the intended use
(e.g. water);
metering conditions: same as the typical operating conditions of the MS in use (i.e. within the
temperature and pressure range which is typical for the liquid for the intended use, e.g. for beer:
temperature range approximately 1 15 C, pressure range approximately 1 3 bar).
Accuracy tests at the limits of temperature, pressure, viscosity and density:
iii. EUT for milk: tests are not required for an EUT intended for a milk MS which works under
typical operating conditions as above (where the processing of milk neither allows high
pressures nor temperatures aside from a small temperature range and the milk has always
nearly the same density and viscosity).
iv.
EUT for beer and other foaming liquids: tests are not required for an EUT intended for a MS
which works under typical operating conditions as above (where the processing of the liquid
neither allows high pressures nor temperatures aside from a small temperature range and the liquids
concerned cover a small density/viscosity range).
Flow disturbance tests: see R117-1, 3.1.5.2
Note: EUT such as electromagnetic meters, ultrasonic meters, vortex meters, turbine meters
(but not PD meters, Coriolis meter) are supposed to be sensitive to disturbances mainly
caused by restricted space (meaning that e.g. bows, elbows are part of the pipe work
upstream of the EUT thus leading to flow disturbances at the inlet of the EUT).
b) Endurance test
c) Accuracy on the minimum measured quantity

E.3 Tests for electronic devices <calculator, correction device, indicating device, associated
devices>
Tests are performed in accordance with R117-2, section 6.
Note: Usually, the calculators are not manufactured directly for the special purpose of
milk/beer MS. Therefore care shall be taken that the legally relevant software of the
calculator includes all functions and parameters which are necessary for the special
measurement purpose, e.g with milk MS the parameter <quantity required to fill the MS,
colloquially flood volume> in case that the measured quantity is corrected automatically by
this parameter.
When these electronic devices are connected to the meter sensors / measuring devices
according to E.2, their compatibility with the meter sensors / measuring devices shall be
established and declared by the manufacturers of the electronic devices.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 103 of 181

E.4 Tests for air/gas elimination devices


E.4.1 Air elimination devices for MS for milk
Tests shall be performed with milk in the course of testing the complete MS according to E.6.1.
Note: Tests with water do not yield representative results for the air elimination device (the
air elimination device is sensitive to the liquid used - cream and foam in the air elimination
device may hamper its correct function, especially when the air elimination device contains
mechanical parts e.g. a float).
Note: Although other paragraphs of R117-2 may allow a separate type approval test of
components, in case of an air elimination device for MS for milk, separate tests are not feasible for
the following reasons:
Receiving MS: The main purpose of the air elimination device is to ensure that under normal
operating conditions of the MS (that is under air intake at the start and end of the measurement acc.
to R117-1, 5.6.3, item 1 and item 2) the MPE of the MS ( 0,5 %) is met. So this MPE can be tested
only under conditions when the complete MS is present and when especially the hose and inlet line
dimensions are as foreseen in the final version.
Receiving / delivering MS: To make the air elimination device operate properly under normal
operating conditions, it is indispensable to embed it into the complex manufacturer specific control
system belonging to the MS. So the air elimination device cannot be tested adequately but with all
parts and functions of the manufacturer specific control system present at the test.
For a separate test the following test pre-requisites would be necessary:
receiving MS: a suction system (vacuum) / pump system working under the same conditions
as the MS for which the air elimination device is foreseen;
receiving / delivering MS: a control system which can register the liquid level in the air
elimination device and which can act upon it in the same way as the MS does;
receiving / delivering MS: if applicable, regulating and non-return valves;
receiving / delivering MS: in case of MS equipped with an air elimination constructed as
bubble sensors, a repeatable air injection system with variable injectors for variable bubble
sizes and a settable and measured air injection rate;
receiving / delivering MS: the testing facility needs to be operated with milk, and all
standards as foreseen for testing the complete MS are necessary.

E.4.2 Gas elimination devices for MS for beer and other foaming potable liquids
Tests are performed either according to a) or b).
a) The EUT is tested in the course of testing the complete MS according to E.6.2.
Note: This is the preferable test, because such MS usually work under pressure, and the product can
either be propelled by means of pressure in the supply tank or by a pump, and
in some cases with a gas back pressure in the reception tank - which might influence the
performance of the EUT; so by this test, the gas pressure influence can be better allowed for than by
a separate test of the EUT.
b) The EUT is tested separately according to R117-2, section 7.
Note: Section 7 states tests for different kinds of gas elimination devices (gas separators, gas
extractors, special gas extractors; each kind is characterized by R117-1, 2.10 according to its
performance). The decision of fitting a MS with a given kind of gas elimination device is based
on an examination considering the worst conditions in which the MS could operate (e.g. in case
that gas intake can only occur when the overground supply tank runs empty, the adequate kind
of gas elimination device is a gas extractor).
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 104 of 181

The test liquid shall either be the same as for the intended use or of a viscosity which is similar to
the liquid for the intended use, e.g. water.
The EUT shall comprise all parts defined by the manufacturer as being the gas elimination device.
In case that for its proper operation the gas elimination device makes use of parts of the MS not
defined by the manufacturer as being the gas elimination device, the test shall be performed together
with these parts (e.g. a specific control system of the MS, into which the gas elimination device is
embedded; e.g. a shut off valve controlled by the gas elimination device which interrupts the flow
during venting the gas elimination device).
The test report must state Qmax and the upper and lower pressure of the gas elimination device.
Care shall be taken when installing the gas elimination device into the MS that Qmax and Pmax of
the MS match with the rated operating conditions of the gas elimination device.

E.5 Tests for ancillary devices


The tests are performed in accordance with R117-2, section 8.

E.6 Additional tests on the complete MS


E.6.1 MS for Milk
General
The accuracy test shall be performed either on the complete MS or on an installation which is
representative for the complete MS.
Note: In order to achieve the required accuracy especially for MS working at high flow rates many components form a complex system for the automatic control of the measurement
procedure. So, any changes (additions or modifications) to the hardware or software of these
components require an application for variant and a corresponding accuracy check as above.
Components of an installation which can be considered as representative for the complete MS:
- Pipe system: The dimensions of the suction lines shall be the same as and the spatial arrangement of
the parts of the suction line upstream of the meter shall be similar to the complete MS.
- The air elimination device, its installation in the pipe system and its control unit shall be identical
to the complete MS.
- The suction elements (such as pumps, ejectors) shall be of the same constructional and functional
principle as in the complete MS, and the EUT shall be tested at the maximum capacity of the
suction elements.
- The software (programs, parameters) of the control unit shall be identical to the complete MS. The
SW-ID shall be registered.
All other components of the MS foreseen in the complete MS which may influence the performance of
the MS (such as control valves being actuated by the control unit, pressure maintaining valves, a
ventilation valve in an empty hose) shall be installed in the EUT as foreseen in the complete MS.
The meter sensor/measuring device/meter shall be installed in the EUT in a position as foreseen in the
complete MS and according to the manufacturers specification (straight pipes, flow straightening
device, minimum back pressure, software setting/configuration, warm up time, etc).
In the following of E.6.1 the EUT is always denoted as MS, regardless whether the test is performed
on the complete MS or on an installation which is representative for the complete MS.
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 105 of 181

The accuracy test shall be performed with milk (ideally raw milk between 7 C und 14 C which causes
little foam formation and creaming; care shall be taken that milk which has been pumped over several
times, still remains in a consistent stage; fat shall be emulsified within the liquid and must not show a
separation from the milk).
E.6.1.1 Accuracy test for receiving MS for milk
The accuracy test is combined with the test of the air elimination device.
The accuracy test shall be performed at the maximum operational flowrate which is automatically set
by the MS.
Note: Qmax of the MS is considered to be the maximum flow rate attained during the test runs.
Note: Receiving MS cannot be tested by determining an error curve because the flowrate
cannot be set, but is a function of the suction element.
Care shall be taken that the operational flowrate is the maximum attainable flowrate, and must not be
reduced e.g. by the control unit or by the ratio of the vehicles gear.
Before the start of each measurement test sufficient milk shall be passed through the MS to ensure
that the MS is completely filled as foreseen.
At the start and finish of a measurement run, the requirement R117-1, 5.6.2.4 must be fulfilled
(settlement of constant level within the range defined by two marks on the sight glass). In case that the
MS measures the level in the constant level tank automatically before and after a measurement (e.g. by
a dipstick) and corrects the received quantity according to the levels, 5.6.2.4 does not apply.
The measurement runs shall be performed without activating a sampling system.
The MS and the supply tank shall be located on level ground; the difference in height between the
pump of the MS and the outlet valve of the supply tank shall not exceed 1 m up or down (see fig.
below).

1m

1m

Suction hose

Prover valve

Test installation
Note: Receiving road tanker MS usually have a suction hose which may either be coupled to a
suction pipe in order to suck off milk churns and other vessels of similar size or directly coupled
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 106 of 181

to the outlet valve of a big supply tank. Receiving stationary MS usually have a suction hose
which is directly coupled to the outlet valve of a supply tank.
Test with suction pipe, at the operational flowrate of the MS; three independent and identical
measurement runs. The measured quantity shall be such that a continuous flow at the maximum
attainable flowrate during at least 1 min is established; anyway, this quantity shall not be less than
2 x MMQ.
Test without suction pipe, with the hose of the MS directly coupled to the supply tank (thus
simulating a big supply tank), at the operational flowrate, three independent and identical
measurement runs. The measured quantity shall be similar as above.
Note: Care shall be taken that the outlet valve of the supply tank is completely open. Otherwise
cavitations may occur leading to the generation of air additional to the start and stop phase of
the reception.
Test of MMQ, with suction pipe, at the operational flowrate of the MS; three independent and
identical measurement runs. Before this test a simulated measurement run with a quantity MMQ
shall be performed.

Each measurement run must fulfil the MPE.


Note: These tests cover the testing of the air elimination device under normal operating
conditions. Contrary to other MS, where the entrance of air is beyond the normal operating
conditions, the entrance of air described in R117-1, 5.6.3 represents the normal working
principle of a receiving MS for milk under rated operating conditions, for which the MPE
applies. So, for receiving MS for milk where air / gas intake occurs often and is therefore
considered to be a part of the normal operating conditions, the MPE equals the MPE of
R117-1, table 2.
E.6.1.2 Accuracy test for delivering MS for milk
Note: Contrary to receiving MS for milk the accuracy test is not combined with the test of the
air elimination device; the test of the air elimination device is described in C.6.1.3.
In case of an empty hose MS, the MS and the receiver tank shall be located on such a level that the
empty hose can be completely emptied.
Before the start of the measurement tests sufficient liquid shall be passed through the MS to ensure
that the MS is completely filled.
The measurement runs shall be performed without activating a sampling system.
-

Test at Qmin, Qmax and at an intermediate flowrate.


Note: Qmax of the MS is considered to be the maximum flow rate attained during the test runs.

Care shall be taken that the operational flowrate is the maximum attainable flowrate, and must not be
reduced e.g. by the control unit.
The measured quantity shall be such that a continuous flow at the maximum attainable flowrate
during at least 1 min is established for all flow rates tested. This quantity shall not be less than 2 x
MMQ.
- Test of MMQ, at any flow rate between Qmin and Qmax, three independent and identical
measurement runs.
Each measurement run must fulfil the MPE.
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 107 of 181

E.6.1.3 Test of the air elimination device for delivering MS for milk
Note: Contrary to receiving MS for milk for which requirements concerning the design and the
extent of tests of the air elimination device are well defined (see R117-1, 5.6), adequate
requirements for delivering MS for milk are missing there. So for delivering MS for milk, the
considerations on the supply conditions (leading to the right choice of the kind of the gas
elimination device) refer to R117-1, 2.10.2 (pumped flow) and R117-1, 2.10.3 (non-pumped flow),
and the extent of tests refers to R117-1, 2.10.8 (gas separator) and 2.10.9 ( gas extractor, special
gas extractor).
Note: The test procedures below are analogous to the test procedures of R117-2, section 7- Testing
procedures for gas elimination devices, with adjustments to the conditions of MS for milk.
Tests on gas elimination devices should be carried out for flow rates up to Qmax of the MS.
The test quantity shall be at least the quantity delivered in one minute at the maximum attainable
flowrate Qmax of the MS.
The test shall be performed twice; from the two test runs the mean error value v shall be calculated.
E.6.1.3.1 Tests on gas separators
The milk is supplied from the supply tank of the MS. The air is drawn in upstream of the gas
separator (either by injection or by suction) through an air inlet control valve.
The volume of air continuously entering the liquid is measured by a gas meter and isothermally
converted to atmospheric pressure on the basis of the indication of a manometer fitted upstream of
the gas meter. The conversion of the (corrected) volume indication Vmetered gas of the gas meter at the
pressure pt to the amount of added gas Va at the atmospheric pressure patmospheric is calculated by
Vmetered gas ( pt p atmospheric )
Va
p atmospheric
Note: The conversion is negligible in the case of sucked-in air.
As required by R117-1, 2.10.8, it is not necessary to use a gas meter if the gas separator is capable of
separating and eliminating the air introduced in any proportion,.
The requirements of R117-1, 2.10.1 and 2.10.8 shall be complied with under test conditions such
that Qmax of the MS is reached when no air enters.
Test procedure
- All measurements must start with the air inlet closed, and the hose full and pressurized. All
measurements must finish with the air inlet closed and the hose pressurized.
- Determine the error curve of the meter from Qmin to Qmax of the MS.
- Start each test run at Qmax of the MS. Then introduce air, regulating the air flow by using the air
inlet control valve. Follow the test steps below.
If there is no liquid flow for more than 10 seconds, close the air inlet and terminate the test run until
the test quantity of the liquid is reached.
- Measurement results gained below Qmin shall be disregarded.
- Calculate the error of the gas separator by taking the error curve of the meter into account.
Test steps
1.
Set the entry of air to 0%.
2.
Vent the liquid pipework completely from entrapped air.
3.
Make a test run at Qmax of the MS.
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 108 of 181

4.

5.
6.
7.
8.

9.

Make the test run at Qmax by adding air of the required proportion. Start the test run with the
air inlet closed. When Qmax is reached add air by regulating the air flow by the air inlet control
valve.
Check the liquid and air flow rate together with the pressure values.
Stop the flow of air and liquid when the test quantity of the liquid is reached.
Read the liquid volume Vs of the liquid standard and the volume Vi indicated by the liquid
meter and calculate Vn.
Calculate the ratio of Va /Vn and the relative meter error Evi(with gas) = (Vi -Vn)/Vn and
determine the difference between Evi(with gas) and Evi(without gas) as the relative error of the
gas elimination device due to the added air.
Repeat step 4 - 8 by increasing the air/liquid ratio. This procedure shall be terminated under
the condition of either a) or b):
a) when it covers the entire range of air/liquid ratio Va/Vn
b) when the discharge stops automatically.

E.6.1.3.2 Tests on gas extractors


An air pocket is created (either by emptying the liquid pipework upstream of the gas extractor or by
emptying the gas extractor itself) of a volume (under atmospheric pressure) equal to the MMQ of the
MS. The other parts of the liquid pipework upstream of the meter must be kept full.
This gas pocket is added to the liquid during the delivery.
When the test is performed by filling up the supply tank with the test quantity and after the delivery
of the liquid the supply tank becomes completely empty (residual discharge), the volume of the air
pocket is deemed to be of the required volume.
Perform the measurements for pumped flow and/or for not-pumped flow, whatever is applicable.
Test steps
1. Vent the liquid pipework completely from entrapped air.
2. Make a test run by setting the MS to Qmax and add the air pocket to the liquid.
3. For adding the air pocket during the delivery: After the gas extractor had acted upon the air
pocket, the flow rate will resume Qmax; continue the delivery at Qmax and stop it by the
delivery valve of the MS, as soon as the test quantity of the liquid is reached.
For a residual discharge: After the gas extractor had acted upon the air pocket, the flow is either
stopped automatically or the delivery valve of the MS is closed manually when the flow rate is zero
for more than 30 s.
4. Read the standard volume Vs and the volume Vi indicated by the meter. Calculate Vn.
Calculate the meter error Evi(with gas) = (Vi -Vn) and determine the difference between the meter
error Evi(with gas) and Evi(without gas) as the absolute error of the air elimination device due to the
added air.
Note:
For a gas extractor, the error limits of R117-1, 2.10.1 apply: The effect due to the influence
of air or gases on the measuring result must not exceed 1% of quantity delivered (but need
not be less than MMQ).
For this test, air is not added continuously, but only once during a delivery. But the error
limit of 1% of quantity delivered means that the test volume can be manipulated to a larger
volume that enables this test to be successful when air is introduced only once.
In order to cope with that problem, the test volume should be related to the worst case i.e. to
the delivery of the MMQ (with the applicable error limit for the MMQ of 1 % of the MMQ);
but for practical reasons it is preferable to deliver a test quantity MMQ; in this case the
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 109 of 181

determination of the difference between the meter error Evi(with gas) and Evi(without gas)
shall be related to the delivery of MMQ by taking into account the absolute (and not the
relative) errors. The difference then must be 1 % of MMQ.
E.6.1.3.3 Tests of special gas extractors
-

Special gas extractors not intended for MS on road tankers:


- Test of the gas separator function: see E.6.1.3.1
- Test of the gas extractor function: see E.6.1.3.2

Special gas extractors intended for MS on road tankers:


- Test of the gas separator function: The test of the gas extractor function as stated below gives
sufficient evidence that the special gas extractor meets the requirements of R117-1, 2.10.9,
second paragraph.
- Test of the gas extractor function: according to E.6.1.3.2 by residual discharge. For MS with
empty hoses the test of the residual discharge shall be carried out such that the delivery to an
underground reception tank is simulated: either the reception tank is placed approx. 3 m beneath
the level of the empty hose valve or an under-pressure of approx. 0, 3 bar is generated in the
hose (e.g. by an acceleration pump). Care shall be taken that the meter remains completely filled
with liquid during the test and the pressure directly behind the meter does not fall below
atmospheric pressure.
- Measurement procedures (gravimetric or volumetric):
1a. Volumetric procedure by receiving the liquid from a standard capacity measure
Each measurement run comprises:
- Fill the standard capacity measure, wait until entrained air has been released from the milk and
then read Vs, Ts.
- Reset the indication device of the meter to zero.
- Start the reception. In case of a suction pipe suck from the bottom of the supply tank and in case
of a hose coupled to the outlet of a supply tank open the outlet valve.
- Suck until the measure is empty and the MS finishes the reception automatically.
- Read Vi and calculate Vn and Evi.
Note 1: Vn is the volume of the test measure at temperature when reading is taken.
Usually, the differences between the temperature at the standard capacity measure and the
temperature at the MS are small so that conversion can be neglected, especially when
considering the small coefficient of expansion of milk compared e.g. with that of hydrocarbons.
Note 2: This procedure covers the testing of the air elimination device under normal operating
conditions.
1b. Volumetric procedure by delivering the liquid into a standard capacity measure
Each measurement run comprises:
- Wait until entrained air has been released from the milk in the supply tank.
- Reset the indication device of the meter to zero.
- Start the delivery.
- Stop the delivery until the measure is full.
- Read Vs, Ts, Vi and calculate Vn and Evi.
Note: Vn is the volume as above.
2a. Gravimetric procedure by receiving the liquid from a tank on a balance
- The weighing instrument (balance) should be of a suitable capacity and a suitable verification
scale interval.
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 110 of 181

Note: A scale interval corresponding to a quantity not greater than 1/10 of the MPE of the MS at
the quantity tested is considered as suitable.
When determining the suitability of the weighing instrument consider situations where the tare
weight of the vessel is likely to vary (e.g. fuel consumption in a vehicle which forms part of the
tare weight of the vessel).
Changeover points can be used to increase the indicating resolution of the weighing instrument.
Note: changeover points means the point at which a digital indication changes from one scale
interval to the next scale interval. This is done by adding weights equal to not more than 10% of
the value of a scale interval to the balance to make the indication increase by 1 digit and then
determining the true value of the indication to 10% of a scale interval.

Each measurement run comprises:


- Fill the tank, wait until entrained air has been released from the milk and then draw a sample of
the milk (without any entrained air) from the tank, determine its density (Ts) and calculate
(Ts) from (Ts) (take an approximate volume expansion factor of water = 200.10-6 C-1):
(Ts) = (Ts) + 200.10-6. (Ts) * (Ts Ts)
- Determine the gross weight Wgross of the tank and milk and Ts
Note: When the hose is coupled to the tank and this influences the reading of the balance, the
hose has to be uncoupled before reading.
- Reset the indication device of the meter to zero.
- Start the pump. In case of a suction pipe suck from the bottom of the supply tank and in case of a
hose coupled to the outlet of a supply tank open the outlet valve.
- Suck until the tank is empty and the MS finishes the reception automatically.
- Read Vi and the weight of the empty tank as indicated by the balance.
- From the gross weight and weight of empty tank determine the net weight of the milk after
correcting for air buoyancy (assume air density as 0,0012 kg/L and enter this value into the
formula in the appropriate units) and from (Ts) calculate Vn and Evi :
Vn = (Wgross - Wnet) / (Ts) * (1 + 0,0012 / (Ts))
Note: This procedure covers the testing of the air elimination device under normal operating
conditions.
2b. Gravimetric procedure by delivering the liquid into a tank on a balance
- The weighing instrument (balance) should be of a suitable capacity and a suitable verification
scale interval.
Note: A scale interval corresponding to a quantity not greater than 1/10 of the MPE of the MS at
the quantity tested is considered as suitable.
- When determining the suitability of the weighing instrument consider situations where the tare
weight of the vessel is likely to vary (e.g. fuel consumption in a vehicle which forms part of the
tare weight of the vessel).
- Changeover points can be used to increase the indicating resolution of the weighing instrument.
Note: changeover points means the point at which a digital indication changes from one scale
interval to the next scale interval. This is done by adding weights equal to not more than 10% of
the value of a scale interval to the balance to make the indication increase by 1 digit and then
determining the true value of the indication to 10% of a scale interval.
Each measurement run comprises:
- Wait until entrained air has been released from the milk in the supply tank.
- Determine the net weight Wnet of the reception tank on the balance.
Note: When the hose is coupled to the tank and this influences the reading of the balance, the
hose has to be uncoupled before reading.
- Reset the indication device of the meter to zero.
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 111 of 181

Start the delivery.


Stop the delivery until the desired quantity is reached.
Read Vi and the weight Wgross of the full reception tank as indicated by the balance.
Draw a sample of the milk (without any entrained air) from the reception tank, determine its
density (Ts) and calculate (Ts) from (Ts) (take an approximate volume expansion factor of
water = 200.10-6 C-1):
(Ts) = (Ts) + 200.10-6. (Ts) * (Ts Ts)
- From the gross weight and weight of empty tank determine the net weight of the milk after
correcting for air buoyancy (assume air density as 0,0012 kg/L and enter this value into the
formula in the appropriate units) and from (Ts) calculate Vn and Evi :
Vn = (Wgross - Wnet) / (Ts) * (1 + 0,0012 / (Ts))
Note: This procedure covers the testing of the air elimination device under normal operating
conditions.
E.6.1.4 Additionally to the tests of E.6.1.1 E.6.1.3, the following shall be checked/examined:
- Check that it is impossible during a measurement to reset the indicating device to zero (that means
when the suction process comes to an end, the indicating device cannot be reset to zero before the
constant level has been reached). When the level is registered automatically (e.g. by an electronic
dip stick) check that resetting of the indicating device to zero is not possible before the level is
registered, and that the level remains constant after registration.
- Check that there are no means by which liquid can be diverted during its passage from the
supply tank to the receiving tank without being measured by the MS. A manually controlled
outlet that may be opened for purging or draining the MS is permissible, but effective means
shall be provided to prevent passage of liquid through any outlet during normal operation of the
MS.
- Examine/test the sampling system (if provided)
Although the sampling system is not under metrological control, it shall be checked to ensure that it
does not interfere with the metrological characteristics of the MS.
If documentary evidence is given that this is the case, no test is necessary; if not, a test shall be
performed by activating the sampling system during a measurement run. The measurement must fulfil
the MPE.
E.6.1.5 Test of the volume required to fill the measuring system (colloquially flood volume, dry start
priming volume) (R117-1, 5.6.2.7)
This test is performed in the course of the initial verification and need not be performed in the course of
a subsequent verification provided that no parts of the MS have been changed since the initial
verification which could affect the flood volume.
Test procedure:
Empty the MS completely, without the pump running. The milk is received from a standard capacity
measure with volume Vn. The difference between the volume Vn and the indication of the meter,
corrected by the meter error, is the searched volume required to fill the MS. This measurement shall
be done twice and the result taken as the mean value.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 112 of 181

E.6.2 MS for beer and other foaming liquids


E.6.2.1 Accuracy test
The tests shall be performed in the delivery mode for systems only intended for delivery. Additional
tests are given for systems that will also be used for receiving liquid.
Note: Although in general the MS are foreseen for the delivery of liquids, they may also be
designed for the reception of liquids.
The test shall be performed either with the liquid for the intended use or with a substitute of a similar
characteristic (when the liquid for the intended use contains carbonic acid then the substitute shall also
contain carbonic acid to a similar extent).
Temperature of the liquid: within the limits of the temperature range of the MS.
Because MS for beer and other foaming liquids are full hose systems, the EUT and the standard
(balance / standard capacity measure) may be located on any level.
Before the start of the measurements sufficient liquid shall be passed through the MS to ensure that
the MS is completely filled.
- Test at Qmin, Qmax and at 2 intermediate flowrates evenly spaced over the flowrate range.
Note: Qmax of the MS is considered to be the maximum flow rate attained during the test runs.
The measured quantity shall be such that a continuous flow at the maximum attainable
flowrate during at least 1 min is established for all flow rates tested. This quantity shall not
be less than 2 x MMQ.
Note: OIML R117-1, 2.3.3.3 requires for MS a ratio of Qmax:Qmin 5:1 (this ratio is defined
by Qmin of the meter and by Qmax of the MS). This ratio may be less, but the MS shall be
fitted with an automatic checking device to detect when the flowrate of the liquid to be
measured is outside the restricted flowrate range. In case of MS for beer and other foaming
liquids, for quality reasons of the delivered liquids it is to keep Qmax low (flow speed below 2
m/s in order to avoid a big shear force at the pipe surface which deteriorates the quality of the
liquid), whereas the nominal size of the meter shall be relatively high (consequently Qmin of
the meter is adequately high), so that the actual ratio Qmax:Qmin for such MS may be below
5:1.

Test of MMQ, at any flow rate between Qmin and Qmax, three independent and identical
measurement runs.
In the case where the MS is intended also for the reception of liquid and the reception procedure is
under metrological control:
Note: Usually, the pipework for the reception is designed and can be operated such that the
pump of the MS is able to suck liquid from a supply tank over the delivery hose and is able to
propel it over the gas elimination device and the meter back to the supply tank of the MS. In
order to prevent oxidation of the liquid, it is the intended concept of such MS that during the
reception no parts of the pipework run empty.
A test additional to the test of the first bullet at an intermediate flowrate shall be performed, with two
independent and identical measurement runs. The measured quantity shall be such that a
continuous flow at the maximum attainable flowrate during at least 1 min is established. This
quantity shall not be less than 2 x MMQ.
The MS shall be completely filled before the start of the test and the reception shall be
performed by draining a known volume from a supply tank (standard capacity measure or tank
on a balance), until the desired quantity is reached without that gases or air are introduced from
the supply tank into the MS.
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 113 of 181

Each measurement must fulfil the MPE.

Measurement procedures (gravimetric or volumetric) to deliver:


1. Gravimetric procedure by delivering the liquid into a reception tank on a balance.
- The weighing instrument (balance) should have a suitable capacity and a suitable scale interval.
Note: A scale interval corresponding to a quantity not greater than 1/10 of the MPE of the
MS at the quantity tested is considered as suitable.
- When determining the suitability of the weighing instrument consider situations where the tare
weight of the vessel is likely to vary (e.g. fuel consumption in a vehicle which forms part of the
tare weight of the vessel).
- Changeover points can be used to increase the indicating resolution of the weighing instrument.
Note: changeover points means the point at which a digital indication changes from one
scale interval to the next scale interval. This is done by adding weights equal to not more
than 10% of the value of a scale interval to the balance to make the indication increase by 1
digit and then determining the true value of the indication to 10% of a scale interval.
Each measurement run comprises:
- Perform the delivery with the hose uncoiled from the reel, if present.
- Fill the delivery hose up to the reception valve of the reception tank.
The reception tank shall be thus prepared that the necessary back pressure representative for the
normal use of such a MS is established in the tank before the delivery starts; during the delivery the
pressure supply shall be switched off, and no pressure shall be released.
- Read the indication of the weight of the tank on the balance.
Note: When the hose is coupled to the tank and this influences the reading of the balance, the
hose has to be uncoupled before reading. By doing so, the pipe section between the coupling
mechanism of the hose and the reception valve of the tank runs empty. Thus, at the start of
the delivery a liquid volume corresponding to this pipe section passes the meter without
being registered by the balance. This volume has to be subtracted from the indication of the
meter.
- Keep the delivery valve closed and start the pump / the pressurizing system (hose becomes
pressurized), then reset the indication device of the meter to zero.
- Start the delivery and fill the tank without pressure release.
Please note that any gas quantity released from or added to the tank during a run contributes to the
mass measurement by the balance. So if for any reasons de-pressurizing/pressurizing the tank is
necessary during a run (e.g. because the pressure of the pump does not overcome the back pressure
in the tank, the back pressure is too low so that the pressure control of the measuring system stops
the delivery, etc.), make the corresponding correction for that subtracted/added quantity of gas. The
correction is calculated by considering that the respective mass of gas in the reception tank at the
pressure P (reading the manometer of the reception tank) is given by:
- the volume of gas in the tank:
Vair/gas in the tank = Vtank - Vliquid in the tank
- and the gas density in the tank at pressure P:
gas(P) = gas(Patmosphere in bar) * (reading of tank manometer in bar +1)
1,8 kg/m3
CO2 (15 C, 1 bar)
-

During the delivery determine the mean liquid temperature Ts (using a reference standard
thermometer with a measurement uncertainty 0.2C).
Note: The liquid temperature can either be determined by an inline temperature sensor or by
drawing a sample (eg from a vent pipe) into a Dewar vessel. Care shall be taken that the
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 114 of 181

determined temperature is representative for the mean temperature of the metered liquid. In
case that the sample is diverted from the metered liquid, correct the metered liquid
adequately for the diverted quantity.
During the delivery draw a sample of the liquid and determine its density (Ts) and calculate (Ts)
from (Ts) (take an approximate volume expansion factor of water = 200.10-6 C-1):
(Ts) = (Ts) + 200.10-6. (Ts) * (Ts Ts)
Note: In case that the sample is diverted from the metered liquid, correct the metered liquid
adequately for the diverted quantity.
Note: Because the liquid is carbonated, care has to be taken that that the density
determination covers the liquid together with its dissolved gas. The density of the liquid
together with its dissolved gas can be determined e.g.
- by diverting the sample into a glass vessel under pressure, which contains the
densitometer (during the density determination the gas remains dissolved),
- by diverting the sample into a volume measure under pressure. Determine the volume
and the mass of the liquid, and from that calculate the density of the carbonated
liquid.
- Stop the delivery by the closure of the delivery valve (hose still pressurized), read Vi and then
switch off the pump / the pressurizing system.
- Read the gross weight of the balance (weight of tank and liquid).
Note: When the hose is coupled to the tank and this influences the reading of the balance,
then uncouple the hose while reading.
From the gross weight and weight of the tank and from (Ts) calculate Vn and Evi.
Do not correct for buoyancy (no gas was displaced from the tank).
Note: Filling the tank with liquid increases the gas pressure in the tank thus increasing the
back pressure, which decreases the flowrate. From start to finish the flowrate Q passes a
spectrum and so do the errors of the meter. In order to avoid that the resulting (mean) error
Evi is a combination of errors > MPE and < MPE, Q has to be kept relatively constant
during the delivery. This can be achieved by de-pressurizing the tank after each test run and
by emptying the tank after one or several test runs.

2. Volumetric procedure by delivering the liquid into a pressurized (closed) standard capacity
measure
Each measurement run comprises:
- Perform the delivery with the hose uncoiled from the reel, if present.
- Wet and drain the standard capacity measure. Adhere to the correct drainage time of the measure
used.
- Fill the delivery hose up to the reception valve of the measure.
- Keep the delivery valve closed and start the pump/pressurizing system (hose becomes
pressurized), then reset the indication device of the meter to zero.
- Start the delivery and fill the measure without pressure release.
- Stop the delivery by the closure of the delivery valve (hose still pressurized), read Vi and then
switch off the pump/pressurizing system.
- Read Vs,Ts and ps and calculate Vn and Evi.
Note: MS for beer and other foaming liquids usually work under low pressure. A volume
correction of the measure according to the pressure Ps has to be performed only in case
when the influence of the pressure on the volume of the measure exceeds 1/10 of the MPE.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 115 of 181

Measurement procedures (gravimetric or volumetric) to receive:


1. Gravimetric procedure to receive the liquid from a delivery tank on a balance.
For the suitable capacity, the suitable scale interval and the changeover points see gravimetric
procedure to deliver.
Each measurement run comprises:
- Perform the reception with the hose of the MS uncoiled from the reel, if present.
- Fill the hose of the MS up to the delivery valve of the delivery tank.
The delivery tank shall be thus prepared that the necessary back pressure representative for the
normal use of such a MS is established in the tank before the reception starts; during the
reception the pressure supply shall be switched off, and no pressure shall be released.
The delivery tank must be filled up with sufficient liquid so that during the reception no gas is
sucked from the tank.
- Read the gross weight on the balance.
Note: When the coupling of the hose (to the tank) influences the reading of the balance, the
hose has to be uncoupled before reading. But by doing so, the pipe section between the
coupling mechanism of the hose and the delivery valve of the tank runs empty. Thus, at the
reception a liquid volume corresponding to this emptied pipe section is missing at the meter
but which had been registered by the balance. This volume has to be added to the indication
of the meter.
- Reset the meter to zero, open the delivery valve of the delivery tank and then start the suction.
- Empty the tank without pressure release.
Please note that any gas quantity released from or added to the tank during a run contributes to
the mass measurement by the balance. So if for any reasons de-pressurizing/pressurizing the tank
is necessary during a run make the corresponding correction for that subtracted/added quantity
of gas. The correction is calculated by considering that the respective mass of gas in the
reception tank at the pressure P (reading the manometer of the reception tank) is given by
- the volume of gas in the tank:
Vair/gas in the tank = Vtank - Vliquid in the tank
- and the gas density in the tank at pressure P:
gas(P) = gas(Patmosphere in bar) * (reading of tank manometer in bar +1)
1,8 kg/m3
CO2 (15 C, 1 bar)
-

During the reception determine the mean liquid temperature Ts as described for the gravimetric
procedure by delivering.
During the reception draw a sample of the liquid and determine its density (Ts) and calculate
(Ts) from (Ts) as described for the gravimetric procedure by delivering.

Stop the reception by switching off the suction and then close the delivery valve; read Vi.
Read the net weight of the balance.
Note: When the hose is coupled to the tank and this influences the reading of the balance,
then uncouple the hose while reading.
From the gross weight, net weight and (Ts) calculate Vn and Evi.
Do not correct for buoyancy (no gas was displaced from nor added to the tank).

2. Volumetric procedure to receive the liquid from a pressurized (closed) standard capacity measure
This procedure is only applicable for standard capacity measures which allow the delivery of the
required test volume without running empty (e.g. standard capacity measures with a level tube).
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 116 of 181

Each measurement run comprises:


- Perform the reception with the hose of the MS uncoiled from the reel, if present.
- Fill the standard capacity measure with sufficient liquid so that during the reception no gas is
sucked from the standard capacity measure.
The standard capacity measure shall be thus prepared that the necessary back pressure
representative for the normal use of the MS under test is established in the standard capacity
measure during the reception.
Read the upper volume Vs of the standard capacity measure and Ts.
- Fill the delivery hose up to the delivery valve of the measure.
- Reset the meter to zero, open the delivery valve and then start the suction.
- Stop the delivery by switching off the suction, then close the delivery valve and read the lower
volume Vs of the standard capacity measure.
- From the upper and lower volume Vs and from Ts calculate Vn and Evi.
Note: MS for beer and other foaming liquids usually work under low pressure. A volume
correction of the measure according to the pressure has to be performed only in case when
the influence of the pressure on the volume of the measure exceeds 1/10 of the MPE.

E.6.2.2 Test of the gas elimination device


This test consists of a residual discharge from a supply tank (gas pocket test).
The supply tank (for road tankers: a compartment of a road tanker) is filled with the test quantity and
then completely emptied until the delivery is interrupted by the gas elimination device.
Note: For this test, the volumetric method is less appropriate than the gravimetric method, because
the volumetric method requires the actual quantity delivered at the end of the test to be within the
readable range of the standard capacity measure.
The test shall be performed in the delivery mode.
For evaluating correctly the efficiency of the gas elimination device adequate test conditions have to
be established: the back pressure in the receiving tank shall be low ( 0,2 bar) and the pressure of
the CO2-atmosphere in the supply tank shall be the same as in normal operation (> 0, 5 bar).
The test shall be performed twice at the maximum attainable flowrate Qmax of the MS; from the two
test runs the mean error value v shall be calculated.
The test quantity shall be at least the quantity delivered in one minute at the maximum attainable
flowrate Qmax.
Note: Gas is not added continuously (and the pressure - by design of such MS - will neither
fall below atmospheric nor below the saturated vapor pressure of the liquid), but only once
during a residual discharge, when the supply tank becomes empty and gas pockets are
introduced into the pipework (see R117-1, 2.10.2).
So the gas elimination device has to be tested as a gas extractor (gas pocket test), for which
the error limits of R117-1, 2.10.1 apply: The effect due to the influence of air or gases on the
measuring result must not exceed 1% of quantity delivered (but need not be less than MMQ).
But this error limit of 1% of quantity delivered means that the test volume can be
manipulated to a larger volume that enables this test to be successful when gas is introduced
only once; in order to cope with that problem, the test volume shall be related to the worst
case i.e. to the delivery of the MMQ (with the applicable error limit for the MMQ of 1 % of
the MMQ).
For practical reasons it is more feasible to deliver a test quantity MMQ; in this case the
determination of the difference between the meter error Evi(with gas) and Evi(without gas)
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 117 of 181

shall be related to the delivery of MMQ by taking into account the absolute (and not the
relative) errors. The difference then must be 1 % of MMQ.
The test procedure is the same as for the accuracy test, with the exception that the delivery is
interrupted by the gas elimination device; in case that a continuation of the delivery is possible (e.g.
by a manual re-start of the pump), the delivery shall be continued until gas is clearly visible in the
sight glass and until any re-start is impossible. The delivery is stopped by the closure of the delivery
valve.
Note: Because such MS usually control the delivery procedure automatically, they may interrupt the
flow for different reasons (e.g. when the gas elimination device registers gas, e.g. when a low flow
rate is registered over a certain period due to a high back pressure in the reception tank). Therefore
care shall be taken that such an interruption is not always interpreted as the response of the gas
elimination device to the entrance of gas and therefore as the end of the delivery.

E.7 Hose variation (see R117-1, 2.15)


Tests only in case of full hose systems.
see also R117-2, Annex A and Annex B

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 118 of 181

Annex F
Testing procedures for measuring systems on pipelines
and systems for the loading of ships
D.1 General Information
The tests in Annex D apply to measuring systems used for pipelines and systems for loading of ships.
These procedures are for all liquids with the exception of systems for potable liquids (foaming or nonfoaming).
In accordance with Section 2.10.4 of part 1, higher viscous liquids are covered by Annex D, but are
not required to have gas elimination devices fitted. In this case, provisions must be made to prevent
the entry of air into the system as per section 5.7.2 of part 1.
D.1.1 Type Approval
Measuring systems on pipelines and systems for loading of ships (to be referenced as Measuring
Systems for the remainder of this annex section) consist of several constituent elements. These
constituent elements may or may not be subject to a separate type approval. According to 6.1.1 of
part 1, the constituent elements of a measuring system shall comply with the relevant requirements.
The type approval of measuring systems involves verifying that the constituent elements of the
system, which have not been subject to separate type approvals, satisfy the applicable requirements.
Tests for carrying out the type approval of measuring systems shall therefore be determined on the
basis of the type approvals already granted for the constituent elements.
When none of the constituent elements have been subjected to separate type approval testing, the
tests provided in sections 5, 6, 7, and 8 shall be performed as required on the applicable elements.
On the contrary, when the various constituent elements are approved separately, it shall be possible
to perform the system type approval based on a review of the type approval drawings / certificates of
the individual constituent elements.
These types of measuring systems are usually single-unit productions built for a specific application.
To take this fact into account, type approval tests are typically carried out for the individual
constituent elements. The testing of the complete measurement system is normally completed
during the initial verification.
In some cases it may not be possible to test complete measuring systems in situ, in this case it is
possible to test the constituent elements in a test facility having comparable conditions as long as the
systems hydraulic conditions can be closely replicated taking into account the requirements of
section 5.3.4 of part 1.

F.1

Metrological controls and performance tests for type approval

F.1.1 Testing procedures for meter sensors, measuring devices and meters with mechanical
indicating devices
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 119 of 181

Testing is completed in accordance with Section 5. These tests include:


Accuracy tests;
Tests on the minimum measured quantity
Endurance testing; and
Notes:
Reverse flow prevention as per section 5.7.3 of part 1 (Uni-Directional System) and
reverse count detection (Uni-Directional and Bi-Directional Systems) shall be
verified.
A Sampling device( if present) shall be verified as per section 5.7.4 of part 1
F.1.2

Testing procedures for electronic devices: calculator, correction, indicating, and


associated devices
Testing is completed in accordance with Section 6.
Notes:
Checking device shall be of type P and result in a visible or audible alarm for the
operator; this alarm shall continue until the flow rate is within the restricted limits.
If the ratio between the maximum and minimum flow rate of the measuring system is
less than 5, verify that the requirements of section 5.7.1 of part 1 are fulfilled.

F.1.3 Testing procedures for gas elimination devices


Testing is completed in accordance with Section 7.
Notes:
1) System shall meet the requirements of section 5.7.2 Prevention of gas flow from part 1

2) If system is not fitted with a gas elimination device, the requirements of Sections 2.10 and
5.1.3 of part 1 shall be fulfilled.
3) It is assumed here that section 7 will either include a complete set of testing procedure for
larger gas elimination devices, or develop a methodology to derive performance of high
capacity devices from that of smaller devices of similar design.
F.1.4 Testing procedures for ancillary devices
Testing is completed in accordance with Section 8.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 120 of 181

Annex G
Testing procedures for measuring systems for the fueling of aircraft

G.1 General information


Most aircraft refuelling tank vehicles and vehicles/carts with hydrant measuring systems are
designed for use at airport locations and are not designed for travel on regular roads (because of
vehicle size limits, maximum axial load, hanging parts, etc.). Therefore, in most cases, it is
necessary to do the test procedures of Annex G on the site of use at an airport.
Measuring systems intended for the fuelling of aircraft usually consist of several constituent
elements. These constituent elements may or may not be subject to a separate type approval.
According to 6.1.1 of OIML R117-1, the constituent elements of a measuring system shall comply
with the relevant requirements.
The type approval of a measuring system intended for the fuelling of aircraft consists of verifying
that the constituent elements of the dispenser, which have not been subject to separate type
approvals, satisfy all applicable requirements.
Tests for carrying out the type approval of a measuring system intended for the fuelling of aircraft
shall therefore start with a full review of the type approvals already granted for the constituent
elements of the measuring system.
When none of the constituent elements has been subject to separate type approval, all the tests
provided in sections 4, 5, 6, and 7 shall be performed. When the various constituent elements have
been approved separately, it may be possible to replace type approval based on tests by type
approval of drawings of the constituent elements.
Measuring systems for fuelling aircraft are usually single-unit productions (they are not massproduced). To take this fact into account, the approval tests are usually carried out on the individual
components. The testing of the complete measurement system is usually most suitable for initial
verification testing.
Before conducting tests, it is necessary to execute the design evaluation of the measuring system
intended for fuelling aircraft by using the general check-list given in R117-3 and the relevant points
of this Annex G.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 121 of 181

G.2

Metrological controls and performance tests for type approval

G.2.1 Testing procedures for meter sensors, measuring devices and meters with mechanical
indicating devices
Testing is completed in accordance with (the applicable parts) Section 5. These tests
include:
Accuracy tests;
Tests on the minimum measured quantity;
Endurance testing; and
Non-return valve configuration and reverse count detection.
G.2.2 Testing procedures for electronic devices: calculator, correction, indicating, and
associated devices
Testing is completed in accordance with Section 6.
G.2.3 Testing procedures for gas elimination devices
Testing is completed in accordance with Section 7.
Note: Measuring systems for the fuelling of aircraft are typically not fitted with a gas
elimination device. In this case, the requirements of Sections 2.10 and 5.1.3 of R117-1 shall be
fulfilled.
G.2.4 Testing procedures for ancillary devices
Testing is completed in accordance with Section 8.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 122 of 181

Annex X
Interpretation, Examples, Advice, and Possible Solutions

X --- Chapter 2
X.2.1 The figure below is added in Annex X to assist with the understanding of constituent
elements of a measuring system (the blue double line represents the liquid flow; the flow control
system consists of the pumps, valves, etc.).

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 123 of 181

Table X.2.1
General metrological requirements for specific components of a measuring system

2.5

2.6.2

2.6.3

Pre-setting device

Conversion device (not


included in calculator)

Price indication device

Memory device

2.2

Printing device

Ancillary device
(main examples)

Temperature measuring
device
Self-service device

Density measuring device

Associated
measuring
devices
Pressure measuring device

Special gas extractor

Gas extractor

Gas separator

Indicating device

mechanical
Electronic calculator
(incl. conversion,
adjustment, correction)

Gas
elimination
device

transdu
cer
electrical

Meter
sensor
mechanical

1.2

Measuring
device

electrical

Section from R117-1

Meter

2.7.1

2.7.2

2.8

X
X

2.9.1

2.9.2

2.10.
1

2.10.
2

2.10.
3

2.10.
5

2.10.
7

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 124 of 181

General metrological requirements for specific components of a measuring system

Density measuring device

Printing device

Memory device

Price indication device

Pre-setting device

Conversion device (not


included in calculator)

Pressure measuring device

Temperature measuring
device
Self-service device

Special gas extractor

2.19.
4
2.20.
1

Ancillary device
(main examples)

2.10.
9
2.19.
2

Associated
measuring
devices

Gas extractor

2.10.
8

Gas separator

Indicating device

transdu
cer
electrical

mechanical

Meter
sensor

Gas
elimination
device

mechanical
Electronic calculator
(incl. conversion,
adjustment, correction)

Measuring
device

electrical

Section from R117-1

Meter

2.20.
2

3.1.1

3.1.2

3.1.3

3.1.4

3.1.5

X
X

3.1.6

3.1.7

3.1.8

3.1.9

3.1.1
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 125 of 181

4.1

4.3.3

4.3.4
X

Meter
sensor
Measuring
device

transdu
cer

3.8

4.2

4.3.1
X
X

4.3.2

3.2

X
X

X
X

X
X

4.3.6

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

3.4

4.3.5

3.3

3.5

3.6

3.7

Conversion device (not


included in calculator)

Pre-setting device

Price indication device

Associated
measuring
devices

Memory device

Printing device

Temperature measuring
device
Self-service device

Density measuring device

Gas
elimination
device

Pressure measuring device

Special gas extractor

Gas extractor

Meter

Gas separator

Indicating device

mechanical
Electronic calculator
(incl. conversion,
adjustment, correction)

electrical

mechanical

electrical

Section from R117-1

General metrological requirements for specific components of a measuring system


Ancillary device
(main examples)

X
X

X
X
X
X

X?
?

Page 126 of 181

X --- Chapter 5 (Testing procedures for meter sensors and measuring devices)
X.5.1 If the meter sensor/measuring device is tested in a complete fuel dispenser (especially at
lower flowrates), a temperature rise during the successive tests can occur. To avoid such a
temperature rise, a connection with a non-return valve and flow regulating valve from the pipe
between the gas separator and the meter sensor, measuring device or meter to the supply tank can be
installed. At lower flowrates, the main liquid flow is fed back to the storage tank via this extra
outlet.]
Every time the meter sensor/measuring device to be tested is connected hydraulically, it should be
operated at the maximum flowrate for at least five minutes (e.g. to reach stability of [liquid]
temperature and removal of air/gas) before measurement starts. Every time a new work session
starts (for example after a stop of one hour or more), the EUT should operate at the maximum
flowrate for at least one minute or until metrological stability is achieved, before the measurement
starts.
X.5.3.4 Advice on Flow disturbance Section 5.3.4
A few disturbance configurations are provided in the case that flow disturbance testing is
performed:

two elbows in the same plane upstream of the meter or the measurement transducer;

two elbows in the same plane upstream of the meter or the measurement transducer and two
elbows in the same plane upstream of the meter or the measurement transducer;

a locked propeller upstream of the meter or the measurement transducer;

a locked propeller downstream of the meter or the measurement transducer,

a valve upstream of the meter or the measurement transducer in several positions (90, 80,
65, 45).
If necessary, additional disturbance configurations may be defined by the technology of the meter.
X.5.4 Determination of flowrate
The flowrate can be obtained under flying start/stop conditions by the following procedure:
1

Start the flow. When the indication is at a whole number of litres/kg (V1), start the
stop-watch.

After at least 30 seconds, stop the stop-watch when the indication is at a whole
number of litres or kilograms (V2).

Calculate the flowrate Q = (V2 - V1) x (60 / t) in L or kg/min

(Where: t = the time elapsed in seconds, from the stop-watch in step 3.)

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 127 of 181

Table X.5.4 Table showing whether different meter technologies are affected by various
operating conditions.
P.D.

Turbine Mass
Flow

Ultrasonic Mag

Temp amb

Y n

N y

Temp Liq

n*
y1
n
Y
n
N
y
n

n*

N*y

N y n*

tba

n
y
n
N
y
y

Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y

n
y
n
N
n
y

N y
n*
n
Y n
n
y
n
y

n
n

n
n

y
Y

y
n

y
n

tba
tba

tba

Pressure Liq
Reynolds/Viscosity
Density
Conductance
Orientation
Flow Profile
(disturbed)
Zero Flow
ExternalVibration (in
use)
Endurance

n
n
n
n
n

Other Y = yes
N = no
TBA = to be
assessed
tba

tba
tba
tba
tba
tba
tba

*unless outside the prescribed range (normal use)


## external vibration in use
Temporary Convenor Note 1: The project group spent a very significant amount of
developing, discussing, editing, and arguing about this Table showing whether different
meter technologies are affected by various operating conditions. The participants at the
Teddington meeting (Oct 2013) decided that it was best to not include the table in the 2CD
because consensus on its contents could not be reached. The convener continues to believe
that the table would have value if consensus could be reached so, it has been left (in
lineout form) to encourage Project Group members to comment on whether the table should
be included and the tables suggested practices.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 128 of 181

X.5.4.3 (continued) Testing at the limits of the rated operating conditions may not be required
when these limits have a negligible effect on the specific meter technology. (For example, it would
not be necessary to test a mass flow meter at the limits of viscosity, or a meter with a pressurebalanced measuring chamber at the limits of pressure).
When it is determined that the rated operating conditions will affect the accuracy of the meter, the
following may be considered:

tests at the limits of pressure are not needed if the maximum liquid pressure is equal to or
below 10 bar;

tests at the limits of pressure may be conducted within 10 bar of the actual limit;

tests on a liquid with a viscosity up to 1 mPas may be used to represent liquids with
viscosities up to 2 mPas;

tests at the limits of viscosity > 2 mPas may be within 20 % of the actual limits;

tests at the limits of liquid density may be within 100 kg/m3 of the actual limits.
Where the measuring system is intended to measure liquid quantities at temperatures from 5 C to
+ 35 C, only one accuracy test at one temperature between 5 C and + 35 C is suggested.
X.5.7 Advice on Section 5.7
Advice/Remarks:
Please note that plain water will freeze during a test on low temperatures, in which case the
EUT would no longer operate normally.
To prevent damage to the flowsensor due to temperature expansion or contraction, do not
close the sensor by means of rigid blinding flanges.
Also keep in mind that in some liquids, bubbles will appear for example by dissolving air.
Especially when testing ultrasonic flowmeters, this could cause ultrasonic signals to be
interrupted, which is an undesired effect.
Before the temperature of the liquid is fully stabilised, temperature convection will cause
small flows of liquid to move up and down through the EUT. On some meters this will
appear as a flow indication where none is expected.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 129 of 181

Advice on 5.7 Test Method Influence test type A


Calculation example:
Flowrate under reference conditions: 0.0400 L/min
Flowrate under test conditions:
0.0500 L/min
Flowrange to be tested:
5 100 L/min
Change in flowrate: 0.05 0.04 = 0.01 L/min
(0.01 / 5) * 100% < 0.3%
0.2% < 0.3% -> O.K.
Precautions for EUT's with installation dependent characteristics:
Some measurement characteristics may to some degree be affected by the way an electronic
meter is installed in a system (the zero-setting of a Coriolismeter for example).
When this is the case, care must be taken that the EUT is not moved nor its installation
changed between the reference test and the other tests.
Ambient temperature tests for ultrasonic flowmeters:
Possibly, ultrasonic flowmeters are fitted with an internal temperature transmitter to perform
corrections for changes in the meter bodys dimensions due to temperature expansion /
contraction. Based on information provided by the manufacturer and/or knowledge of
physics, it should be checked by calculation which part of the observed changes, can be
contributed to changes in the dimensions of the EUT and which is caused by effects on the
EUTs electronics for which these tests are intended.
Ambient temperature tests for electromagnetic flowmeters:
If equipped with a temperature transmitter for corrections, the same applies as for the
ultrasonic flowmeters.
Ambient temperature tests for Coriolismeters:
Most Coriolismeters are equipped with an internal temperature transmitter for the purpose of
correction. Due to changing measurement tube temperature, the EUTs characteristics will
change during the ambient temperature tests. To test the effects on the EUT's electronics
separately, this mechanical effect can be eliminated. When one pick-off coil is connected in
parallel to both applicable inputs, the mechanical effect of temperature changes is eliminated.
Advice on 5.7 Test Method Influence test type B
For precautions, see Influence tests type A.
Advice to chapter 5 concerning meter types:
Low-Flow-Cut-off

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 130 of 181

Possibly in electronic meters a so-called low-flow-cut-off is installed. This feature will


consider flowrates below this value not be a measurement. Once a flowrate higher than this
value is registered, will the flowrate (without subtraction of the low-flow-cut-off value) be
registered as a measurement. During testing, in most cases, it is desirable to see all flow
indications, even if below the normal low-flow-cut-off value. Therefore, during most
performance tests the low-flow-cut-off should be set to zero.
Please note that in practice an indication other than zero is needed during testing. Generally
the value in practice depends on the zero-stability of the meter, the minimum measured
quantity of the complete measuring instrument / system and the application itself.
Meter curve, electromagnetic flowmeters
Meter performance of an electromagnetic flowmeter is typically determined by the electric
conductivity of the liquid and the flow profile.
Meter curve, ultrasonic flowmeters
Several effects determine the metrological behaviour of ultrasonic flowmeters:
The acoustic damping of the liquid:
If the amplitude of the signal decreases to much, the signal to noise ratio becomes so small
that the measurement signal becomes unreliable.
The flow profile of the liquid through the measurement sensor:
From the speed of the liquid through the measurement paths, the average flowrate is
determined. This is done by applying a weighing factor to the liquid speeds measured
through particular paths. If these do not represent the actual flow profile, an incorrect
flowrate is determined.
The Reynolds number:
Basically an ultrasonic flowmeter is a Reynolds dependent device. The combination of the
sensors inner diameter, the average speed of the liquid, the liquid density and the liquid
viscosity determine the Reynolds number. Therefore the operating range of an ultrasonic
meter can be given as the ranges of each of these factors or as a Reynolds range.
Gas bubbles and solid particles:
Both gas bubbles and solid particles contained within the liquid affect the meters
performance due to the fact that they disturb/reflect the ultrasonic signal. Moreover, if the
signal is not disrupted, the volume of gas bubbles will be attributed to the liquid volume.
However, when the signal is disrupted by gas bubbles or solid particles, this can be detected
by an ultrasonic meter. Detection of such events can be followed by a correcting action, such
as for example stopping the flow. If the flow is interrupted quickly enough, the effect of gas
bubbles and/or solid particles can be reduced to acceptable proportions. The sensitivity of an
ultrasonic meter to gas bubbles and/or solid particles will depend on many factors.
Therefore, specific tests would need to be done to prove that effects are within acceptable
limits.
Meter curve, Coriolis meters
Typically liquid density and/or liquid pressure may have an effect on the devices
metrological characteristics. Possibly, effects are automatically corrected for, but in some
cases the meter curve may need to be determined under pressures and/or on liquids of a
similar density and/or pressure as present in the end-application.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 131 of 181

If it is proven during a type approval, that the effects given above are negligible or properly
corrected for, a Coriolismeters curve can be determined on a liquid which is not similar to
the one in the end-application. In that case a meter curve determined on water could for
example suit an application on LPG.
Installation effects on Coriolismeters:
The meters installation dependent zero setting affects the metrological behaviour of the
device. Therefore it must be checked that the zero setting is correct, once the device is
installed. The documentation, manuals, Type approval certificate must state when zero
setting must be performed (for example when the installation has been disturbed, change of
liquid, change of temperature).
Coriolis sensor:
All Coriolismeters basically consist out of two sensors: one flowsensor (usually consisting
out of one or two parallel measurement tubes) and a temperature sensor for the benefit of
performing temperature corrections on the vibrational properties of the flowsensor.
The primary measurement signals of a Coriolismeter are the following:
a time difference related to the mass flowrate through the flowsensor
a resonant frequency related to the density of the liquid in the flowsensor
a resistance related to the temperature of the measurement tube(s)
The measurement tube(s) is/are set into motion (a sinusoidal vibration) by means of an
alternating current through one or more so-called drive coils. The movement of the
measurement tubes is detected using at least two pick-off coils. In principle these coils are
considered to be electronic components, thus making a Coriolis flowsensor an electronic
device, on which the applicable performance tests need to be performed. However, the
measurement tubes themselves are purely mechanical components. Only when it is proven
that these coils are sufficiently insensitive to the effects of the test conditions, is it allowed
not to submit the Coriolis flowsensor to influence/disturbance tests.
Density measurement:
In principle all Coriolismeters perform both a mass flowrate and a density measurement.
Both the mass and/or the volume of liquid can be the bases for the measurement transaction.
If so desired by the applicant, both the mass and volume output of the equipment under test
can be tested against legal requirements. In the case of a Coriolismeter, volume is calculated
from measured mass and measured density. So once it is determined that the calculation of
volume operates correctly, verification of the mass and density determination suffices to
guarantee the correctness of the Coriolismeters mass and volume outputs.
Effect of liquid properties:
Some Coriolismeters may be affected by the density of the measurand, in which case the
meter curve will shift dependent of the liquid density.
Extremely high liquid viscosities also may have an effect. This is thought to be caused by the
liquid absorbing the vibrational energy of the measurement tubes, thus reducing the
amplitude of the vibration. In extreme cases such a reduction will cause the measurement
signals to become too small for correct processing. Such effects occur especially when the
flow is started.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 132 of 181

X.7 Advice Annex for Section 7 Test Procedures for Gas Elimination
Devices
X.7.4 Figure 1 Test bench for gas separators

Gas is introduced into the test liquid when the valves in the gas supply line are open. The gas flow is
set by the throttle valve and the gas meter. By manometer P3 the actual gas volume is converted to
atmospheric pressure.
2 optional test methods:
a) The liquid volume Vn (without gas) of the delivered liquid is measured by the scale /
volumetric prover and the volume Vi delivered over the gas separator is measured by the
liquid meter Z1.
b) The liquid volume Vn (without gas) is measured by the liquid meter Z2 and the volume Vi
delivered over the gas separator is measured by the liquid meter Z1;
the precondition for this test is that before and after the test the gas separator is completely
filled resp. filled to the same extent.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 133 of 181

X.7.4

Figure 2 Test bench for gas extractors (gas pocket test)

The gas pocket is created in the gas reservoir with stop-valve V1 kept closed. The required volume
of the gas pocket is created by filling up the gas reservoir with liquid to the known volume of the gas
reservoir and then by draining it partially over its drain valve.
For the test run the gas pocket is discharged from the gas reservoir to the liquid stream by opening
valve V1 completely and closing valve V2.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 134 of 181

X.7.4

Figure 3 Test bench for special gas extractors

No.:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

Component
supply tank
tank on scale
bottom valve
in-line valve
stop valve
manual valve
non return valve
throttle valve with sight glass
in-line valve
throttle valve
sight glass
manometer
thermometer
pump
scale
positive displacement meter
gas meter
(optional) gas flow rate sensor

Name
B2, B1
B3
V2, V1
V4, V3
V5, V6, V21, V16
V17
V15
V23
V24, V26, V27
V34
S1, S2, S3, S4
P1, P3
T2, T1
K1, K2
W1
Z1
Z2
Z3

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 135 of 181

Heights h1 and h2:


For gravity discharge tests a static height difference (h1) between the supply tank and the meter
and a static height difference (h2) between the meter and the tank on the scale (B3) shall be
provided. Height h1 shall be at least above the level where the special gas extractor and meter
are completely filled. By opening the valves of the supply tanks the special gas extractor is
completely flooded. Before testing, the pipework from the supply tanks up to the automatic stop
valve (V21) is completely filled with liquid. For a high flow rate height h2 should be as large as
possible.
The use of a suction pump at the outlet of valve (V23) is not recommended, because determining
the start and end conditions of remaining product in the pump is not well defined.
Pipe connection for pumped and gravity discharge tests:
During gravity discharge tests valve (V5) is open. The test liquid flows via the bottom valve (V1
and/or V2), (V5) and (V6) to the special gas extractor. The flow rate is throttled via the valve
(V23) to make sure that meter (Z1) is constantly flooded. Make sure that the liquid pressure
directly downstream of the meter is not below atmospheric pressure.
For pumped discharge tests valve (V5) has to be closed and the pump K1 has to be switched on.
Residual discharge test of the gas extractor function
The delivery of liquid is carried out either from supply tank (B1) or (B2). The pipe route is
enabled depending on the type of test (gravity discharge or pump operation).
The throttle valve (V23) is fully open. After the start of the delivery the stop valve (V21) is
opened and the liquid flows through the special gas extractor into the tank on the scale (B3). In
case of gravity discharge, the throttle valve (V23) has to be set such that the liquid pressure at
manometer P3 is never below the atmospheric pressure.
After each test run the liquid pipework from the bottom valve of the supply tank in use to the
discharge pipe (V21) is ventilated.
Empty compartment test of the gas extractor function
The delivery of liquid is carried out by filling one of the two supply tanks with test liquid
whereas the other supply tank is completely empty. The valves in the pipes are switched
depending on the type of test (gravity discharge or pump operation). After the start of the
delivery the automatic stop valve (V21) opens and the test liquid flows through the special gas
extractor into the weighing tank (B3).
During the delivery the liquid path is switched from the supply tank in use to the empty supply
tank. When the special gas extractor comes into action the liquid path is switched back to the
supply tank. After each test run the liquid pipework from the bottom valves of the supply tanks
to the discharge pipe (V21) is ventilated.
Test of the gas separator function with continuous gas supply
A continuous supply of gas is added to the liquid by opening valve (V17). The gas flow is set by
a throttle valve (V34), a gas meter (Z2) and a gas flow rate sensor (Z3).
Valve (V16) will be automatically opened, when the automatic stop valve (V21) is released by
the special gas extractor and liquid is flowing.
The delivery of liquid is carried out by filling the supply tank (B1) or (B2) with liquid. The
valves in the pipes are switched depending on the type of test (gravity discharge or pump
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 136 of 181

operation). After the start of the delivery the automatic stop valve (V21) is opened. The liquid
flows through the special gas extractor into the tank on the scale (B3).
During the delivery, a continuous flow of compressed gas is simultaneously introduced into the
liquid pipework. When the liquid measuring process is interrupted by the special gas extractor,
the automatic stop valve (V21) and the valve (V16) are closed and the flow of the liquid and
compressed gas supply is interrupted.
By the gas meter (Z2) and the manometer (P2), the percentage of gas volume related to the
liquid volume can be calculated.
After each test run the liquid pipework from the bottom valves to the discharge pipe (V21) is
ventilated.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 137 of 181

X.7.4

Figure 4 Test bench for gas separators in fuel dispensers

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 138 of 181

X.7 Advice Annex for Section 7 Test Procedures for Gas Elimination Devices
X.7.4

X.7.4 Figure 1: gas separator test stand

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 139 of 181

X.7.4, Figure 2: Air pocket test bench for refinery applications


(the volumetric prover could also be a gravimetric scale)

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 140 of 181

X.7.4, Figure 3: Layout of the special gas extractor test bench

No.:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

Component
Storage tank
Test container
Foot valve
In-line valve
Stop valve
Ball valve
Check valve
Throttle valve with sight glass
In-line valve
Throttle valve
Sight glass
Pressure manometer
Thermometer
Pump
Scale
Positive displacement meter
High pressure gas meter
Rotameter

Name
B2, B1
B3
V2, V1
V4, V3
V5, V6, V21, V16
V17
V15
V23
V24, V26, V27
V34
S1, S2, S3, S4
P1, P3
T2, T1
K1, K2
W1
Z1
Z2
Z3

X.7.4, Table 1: System components of the test bench

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 141 of 181

Annex X.A (non-mandatory)


This part of Annex X contains Advice and Suggested Practices concerning:
Testing procedures for fuel dispensers (type evaluation advice and suggested practices)
these Sections are numbered X.A.n.n.n and correspond to the Sections numbered
A.n.n.n in Annex A;
Draft testing procedures for fuel dispensers (for initial verification) these Sections are
numbered X.A-I.n.n.n and starts in Section X.A-I.7.
Testing procedures for LPG dispensers (type evaluation advice and suggested
practices) these Sections are numbered X.A-LPG.n.n.n and correspond to the
Sections numbered A.n.n.n in Annex A;
Draft testing procedures for LPG dispensers (for initial verification) these Sections
are numbered X.A-LPG-I.n.n.n and starts in Section X.A-LPG-I.nn.

Temporary Note: a decision to not include the initial verification test procedures in the
(mandatory) Annexes of the 2CD of R117-2 was made at a Project Group meeting in Teddington
in October 2013. Instead, these draft initial verification test procedures are planned to be part of
the next revision cycle of R117.
X.A.2.1

Accuracy tests

a) Determine Qmin and Qmax for associated viscosity/defined fluid to be measured


b) Put meter on test rig as per manufacturers specifications, see OIML R117-2 section 5.1.
Test rig might include a pump, associated piping, feeding tank, control valves, hose and
nozzle. None of these parts shall interfere with the performance of the meter under test. If
the test rig is provided by the manufacturer, it shall be capable of ensuring that no air or
vapor is fed to the meter during testing (no cavitations).
c) Adjust the meter to the closest zero setting at highest applicable flow rate for approval
(or at least 80% of such value as per requirement of manufacturer)
d) If more than one adjustment point is needed, refer to manufacturers adjustment
procedure (ie: in case of multipoint adjustment curve for dynamic adjustment)
e) Secure adjustment setting as it shall remain unchanged for X.A.2.1.g, X.A.2.2 and
X.A.2.3. Any change to adjustment settings of meter before end of tests related to
section A.2.3 will invalidate test results related to section X.A.2.1.g, X.A.2.2 and
X.A.2.3. Securing adjustment setting shall be achieved with adequate seals or isolation of
the EUT in a room/building until tests related to section X.A.2.3 are finished.
f) Establish the list of flowrates to be tested as per OIML R117-2 section 5.3.2.1
g) Carry out testing for each flowrate (see 5.3.2.1) and record the accuracy test results. All
results shall be within the applicable MPE.
h) Repeat g) at the limits of operation as per OIML R117-2 clause 5.3.3.
i) If applicable, repeat g) with different disturbances as per OIML R117-2 clause 5.3.4.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 142 of 181

X.A.2.2

Tests on the MMQ (with maximum specified hose length if applicable) ;

a) Confirm adequate hose arrangement for type approval Flush hose with 3 minutes of
continuous flow to remove any remaining air bubble.
b) Activate pumping system to pressurize instrument/meter
c) Stop pump leave idle for 1 minute
d) Reset indication, activate pump, pressurize instrument/meter and deliver a quantity equal
to MMQ at maximum achievable flow rate in the measuring standard.
e) Record accuracy test result. Result shall be within applicable MPE for MMQ as per
clause 2.5.1 of OIML R117-1
f) Repeat steps b) to e) two more times

X.A.2.3

Endurance testing - see OIML R117-2 section 5.4

Endurance test and related accuracy tests shall be conducted with a fluid having a low viscosity /
low lubrication capacity in viscosity range requested by manufacturer

X.A.2.4

Check of reverse flow prevention

During meter testing, systems which are designed to cope with reverse flow shall be assessed, and
recorded in type approval file (description of solution, e.g.: combination of non-return valve and/or
reverse pulse counting)
Manufacturer shall provide test method to demonstrate that design copes with reverse flow. Test
shall be conducted and result recorded.
Note on OIML R117-1 - 2.13.4:
2.13.4 When reversal of the flow could result in errors greater than the minimum specified
quantity deviation, a measuring system (in which the liquid could flow in the opposite direction
when the pump is stopped) shall be provided with a non-return valve. If necessary, the system shall also be fitted with a
pressure limiting device
It is the purpose of this clause of R117-1 to make sure that reversal flow cannot influence next transaction when system
get repressurized. Achieving such function with a non-return valve. But such system requires a pressure limiting device
to avoid hose or piping to burst open in case of heat overpressure on hose (sun radiation) or hose overrun. Modern
solution can also imply reverse pulse counting during idle time of system, so repressurizing does not result in errors
greater than the minimum specified quantity deviation.

X.A.4 Testing procedures for gas elimination


Requirements on MPE for gas elimination are in OIML R117-1 section 2.10.1

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 143 of 181

Notes:
1) adequate means shall be used to prevent de-priming the suction line connecting EUT to storage
tank. Air injection point shall be implemented between such means and EUT.
2) a setting run can be needed to set air intake/flow rate to next Qi rate before performing real
accuracy test. As test shall commence and stop with air intake closed (at end of accuracy test
flow, accurate termination is done with nozzle trigger), valve controlling air intake might be
secured with a second valve in-line to stop/start air-intake without touching setting of main airintake valve.
X.A.6.4.6

Temperature conversion (if applicable)

X.A.6.4.6.1 Method 1: use of a measuring standard capable of correcting also for temperature at
final reading (as resulting temperature in a readable information with some measuring standards
such as proving cans, with probe sensing fuel temperature in the middle if the volume of fuel)
a) Definition of MPEC (Maximum permissible error with correction). MPEC is the addition of
applicable line A or B of table 2 of OIML R117-1 and line C for the applicable class
(example: if EUT is full measuring system under class 0.5, MPE is 0.5% (line A) and
conversion extra MPE is 0.2% (line C) as per OIML R117-1 clause 2.7.1.2)
b) Use 2 storage tanks of the same fuel, each at a different temperature. Tank 1 shall be cold,
tank 2 shall be warm. Temperature difference between tank 1 and tank 2 shall be at least
10C. The length of connection piping from tanks to the EUT shall be minimal.
c) Pre-condition measuring standard on tank 1. Adjust meter to closest to zero setting.
d) Execute accuracy test on tank 1. Volume of test shall be at least 2xMMQ + volume of piping
and no more than 4xMMQ + volume of piping from tank to EUT. Record result. Result shall
be within MPEC.
e) Switch EUT to tank 2. Do not flow liquid from tank 2 unless it is for the next accuracy test.
f) Execute accuracy test on tank 2. Volume of test shall be at least 2xMMQ + volume of piping
and no more than 4xMMQ + volume of piping from tank to EUT Record result. Result shall
be within MPEC
g) Switch EUT to tank 1. Do not flow liquid from tank 2 unless it is for the next accuracy test.
h) Execute accuracy test on tank 1. Volume of test shall be at least 2xMMQ + volume of piping
and no more than 4xMMQ + volume of piping from tank to EUT Record result. Result shall
be within MPEC
i) When applicable, check correction table of calculator (or checksum signature when
applicable) and record
Notes:
-

X.A.6.4.6.2

The purpose of this Method 1 process is to check global response of Temperature


conversion, using measurement standards capable of correcting result with final
temperature of transferred fuel. As these means might not be easy to deploy for
testing, method 2 allows for spit verification for type approval purposes.
Special safety precautions shall be in use to prevent fuel hazard when heating.
Method 2: split EUT verification for type approval

These tests can be done with a low hazard fuel such as mineral spirit
a) It is recommended to execute these tests with a low hazard fuel such as mineral spirit
b) EUT arrangement shall be with very short hose
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 144 of 181

c) Install reference probe (1) at EUT temperature well


d) Install reference probe (2) at EUT nozzle spout tip
e) Disengage temperature correction of EUT (note: refer to manufacturers manual as this
might be the way to have maintenance information displayed on EUT dial such as
temperature of fuel at EUT conversion probe)
f) Run flow through EUT at Qmax from storage tank for at least 3 minutes to stabilize fluid
temperature and EUT temperature (outgoing flow can be re-circulated back to storage tank)
g) Check accurate temperature reading by comparing temperature indicated by EUT (converted
signal from its own temperature probe) with reference reference probe (1) inserted in
temperature well close to instrument meter/transducer. Maximum difference allowed is 1.6
C (equivalent to 0.2% - line C of table 2 of OIML R117-1 for gasoline)
h) Warm up storage tank by 10C minimum from actual temperature
i) Read read Probe (1) = PT0, and temperature indicated by EUT =PTS
j) Initiate flow at Qmax and start stopwatch simultaneously
k) After 15s (+/- 1 second), read Probe (1) = PT1, probe (2)=PT2 and temperature indicated by
EUT =PTI
l) Stop flow
m) If difference between PT2 and PT1 is greater than 1C, redo test or re-assess test situation
n) (PTS-PTI) shall be greater than 90% of (PT1-PT0)
Note: testing of g) and k) can be arranged outside of EUT by using a reference bath to
compare EUT probe reading and reference probe reading. Such an arrangement also allows
for the full range of temperature to be covered.

X.A-I.7

General Information for initial verification Preamble

Initial verification of fuel dispensers may be done either:


a) At factory of the manufacturer,
under quality insurance control, if permitted by the national authority of the
country of use.
by inspection of apparatus, routine or batch sample, as per regulation of the
country of use; this is done by authorized inspection organization
b) At site of use. Common practice is for national authorities to perform this, unless it is
subcontracted to an approved/authorized representative of the manufacturer or
authority.
Note: The expression measuring standard will be used here to replace any of the
possible tools used such as (with no prejudice to validation of such tool and process to be
adequate for the test and pre-conditioning such tools).

X.A-I.7.1

Initial verification at manufacturers premises

1) Test fluid: the use of any substitute fluid for testing shall be validated with fuel comparison
data to assess resulting uncertainties
2) Test conditions: environmental conditions (temperature) shall be part of uncertainty
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 145 of 181

assessment.
3) Measuring standard (proving cans/verification standards/weighting system): uncertainty and
delivery volume to be assessed according to requirement of R117-1 : 2.5.3
4) Sampling and/or split verification (e.g.: separate component check prior to integration in
dispenser). It is allowed to perform tests at earlier stages of manufacturing process (for
example: testing 100% of meters individually before integration in dispensers; testing 100%
of calculators on simulators, testing 100% of air-separation components on special test
bench, testing 100% of SSDs) as long as the manufactured dispensers or SSDs are checked
under statistical (minimally 10% of the manufactured population) or systematic survey at
final test.
X.A-I.7.1.1

Administrative verification

a) Verify compliance of the design to the type approval certificate/number (reference to the
certificate shall be on type approval plate as per R117-1 section 2.19.1 and 2.19.2, and on
relevant manufacturing paperwork).
b) Check that all metrological components (eg: calculator, meter, air separator) are referenced
in the type approval certificate.
c) Check that of the required seals are in place and prevent normal dismounting/opening of
associated component (seals do not need to be marked at this time).
d) Check that the MMQ is clearly indicated for normal conditions of use (see R117-1 section
2.19.1) at dial level.
e) Check that the identification plate(s) is (are) compliant with the type approval certificate
information (or registered design) and include(s) all markings required in R117-1 section
2.19.
f) Check that identification plate(s) is (are) sealed/attached to dispenser in a durable way.
g) Record the pass/fail result on the initial verification paperwork. In case of failure, record the
reason for the failure.

X.A-I.7.1.2

Accuracy test at high and low flow rates (testing for fully assembled dispensers)
Note: If meters were individually tested before dispenser assembly, this process shall
be described in manufacturers quality plan.

a) Disengage temperature conversion (if applicable).


b) Pre-condition measuring standard.
c) Lift the nozzle of the EUT, place in inlet of measuring standard for high flow, check that the
display is reset to zero and stays at zero for 5 seconds, open nozzle to achieve the maximum
flow rate, perform the accuracy test, and hang the nozzle.
d) Record the result and the actual flowrate of the test performed.
e) Check the results versus the MPE requirements of R117-1 section 2.6.1 line A of table 2, and
check that the flowrate is between 70% and 100% of maximum flowrate of the type approval
certificate (see also the identification plate).
f) Lift the nozzle of the EUT, place in inlet of measuring standard for low flow, check that the
display is reset to zero and stays at zero for 5 seconds, open the nozzle to achieve the
minimal flow rate (adjust the flow to stay between 100% and 120% of the minimal flow rate
of type approval), perform the accuracy test, and hang the nozzle.
g) Record the result and the actual flowrate of the test performed.
h) Check the results versus the MPE requirements of R117-1 section 2.6.1 line A of table 2
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 146 of 181

i) Record the pass/fail result on the initial verification paperwork. In case of failure, record the
reason for the failure (if known).
Note: during test b) and e), the volume of the delivery shall be at least 2 times the MMQ (see R117-1
section 2.5.1).

X.A-I.7.1.3
2.18.2)
a)
b)
c)
d)

e)

f)
g)
h)
i)

Accuracy test at MMQ and Vapor-recovery check (OIML R117-1, Section

Disengage temperature conversion (if applicable).


Pre-condition the measuring standards (wetting) -- the volume of the test shall be the MMQ.
Disable the increment masking feature at the calculator.
Lift the nozzle of the EUT, place in the measuring standard for MMQ, check that the display
is reset to zero and stays at zero for 5 seconds, open the nozzle to achieve the maximum
possible flow rate with no spillage, execute the accuracy test.
For gasoline hoses with vapor recovery: do not hang the nozzle. Place the nozzle tip out of
the measuring standard. Wait for 2 minutes (or for calculator time out) to witness any
unexpected extra increment at the display or any unwanted flow at the nozzle spout. Record
the results.
Hang the nozzle.
Record the result of the MMQ check.
Check the results versus the MPE requirements of R117-1 (see R117-1: 2.5.3).
Record the pass/fail result on the initial verification paperwork. In case of failure, record
reason for the failure (if known).

X.A-I.7.1.4

Check of hose dilation and draining (see R117-1 sections 2.13.6 and 2.15)

X.A-I.7.1.4.1 General
The purpose of this section is to check hose dilation and the nozzle anti-draining device as well as
the means to prevent reverse flow to meter. All applicable steps of this section shall be carried out
in sequence, with not more than 3 minutes between each sub-section of A.7.1.4.
X.A-I.7.1.4.2 Hose dilation
a) If an electronic calculator is present, unmask small increments at display.
b) Lift the nozzle and do not extend/extract the hose from the dispenser (use actual free reach of
the hose) and observe the display for 30 seconds. Read the display after 30 seconds (HD1).
Check the volume HD1 against the MPE for hose dilation over MMQ. Record HD1 and
MMQ.
X.A-I.7.1.4.3 Draining (procedure from X.A-I.7.1.4.2 continues here)
a) Place the nozzle spout in a receptacle (any compatible liquid vessel).
b) Activate the nozzle switch without hanging the nozzle (simulate the nozzle returned to the
nozzle boot to terminate the transaction), and observe potential liquid drainage from nozzle
spout for 1 minute.
c) Release the nozzle boot switch to start a new transaction and observe the display for 30
seconds. The display shall reset first and then the dispenser shall start new transaction. Read
the display after 30 seconds (HD2). Check volume HD2 against the MPE for hose dilation
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 147 of 181

over MMQ. Record HD2.


d) Place the nozzle back in the nozzle boot to terminate the transaction.
X.A-I.7.1.4.4 Hose dilation with hose reel (if applicable, in continuation of X.A-I.7.1.4.3)
a) While keeping the nozzle in the nozzle boot, uncoil the full length of the hose (on the floor if
needed, this action might require special tools such as clamps or locking devices if the hose
retractor is automatic).
b) Lift the nozzle and observe the display for 30 seconds. The display shall reset first and then
the dispenser shall start the new transaction. Read the display after 30 seconds (HD3). Check
the volume HD3 against the MPE for hose dilation over MMQ. Record HD3.
X.A-I.7.1.4.5 Draining (procedure from X.A-I.7.1.4.4 continues here)
a) Place the nozzle spout in a receptacle (any compatible liquid vessel).
b) Activate the nozzle switch without hanging the nozzle (simulate nozzle back in the nozzle
boot to terminate transaction), and observe the potential liquid drainage from nozzle spout
for 1 minute.
c) Release the nozzle boot switch to start a new transaction and observe the display for 30
seconds. Display shall reset first and then the dispenser shall start a new transaction. Read
the display after 30 seconds (HD4). Check volume HD4 against the MPE for hose dilation
over MMQ. Record HD4.
d) Place the nozzle back in nozzle boot to terminate the transaction.
X.A-I.7.1.5 Test of the timeout function on dispensers with an electronic indicator (see
R117-1 section 5.1.15)
Note: this test only applies to dispensers with electronic indicators. This test can be
replaced by software revision control.
a) Lift nozzle to activate the dispenser
b) Do not deliver fuel wait for the timeout.
c) Check that dispenser switches off and terminates the transaction within a period not
greater than 120 seconds.
d) Hang the nozzle for 5 seconds
e) Lift the nozzle to activate the dispenser.
f) Deliver a quantity of fuel into the receptacle.
g) Stop the flow and note the time.
h) Check that the dispenser switches off and terminates the transaction within a period not
greater than 120 seconds.
i) Hang the nozzle.
j) Record the result of tests of c) and h).

X.A-I.7.1.6 Air elimination check -- process for fully assembled dispensers


Note: Adequate air separator individual test upstream manufacturing flow must be
integrated in manufacturers quality plan.
X.A-I.7.1.6.1 General

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 148 of 181

a) suction line connected to EUT shall be equipped with a suction air-inlet plug with a
calibrated inlet hole (example: between 1.5 and 2.5mm diameter). Plug shall be equipped
with a control valve to open/close plug to atmosphere
b) pre-condition measuring standard volume of check will be 20 liters minimal
c) lift nozzle of EUT, place in measuring standardl for high flow, check that display is reset to
zero and stays at zero for 5 seconds, open nozzle to achieve maximum possible flow rate
with no spillage, execute check
X.A-I.7.1.6.2 Alternative 1 air elimination test with result
a) during the flow, open the suction air-inlet plug for 15 seconds (or less if the pump system
terminates delivery upon air detection)
b) hang nozzle
c) read accuracy test result and record result as air elimination check
d) check results versus MPE requirements of R117-1 (take in consideration viscosity of fluid or
test-fluid in use if applicable) and decide or pass/fail result
X.A-I.7.1.6.3 Alternative 2 air elimination test with blowing evidence
a) during the flow, open the suction air-inlet plug for 15 seconds (or less if the pump system
terminates delivery upon air detection)
b) check evidence of air blowing out of air-vent of air-separator
c) hang nozzle
d) if no air-flow was sensed at air-vent, consider air-separation has failed
X.A-I.7.1.6.4 Record pass/fail result on initial verification paperwork.

X.A-I.7.1.7

Ancillary devices

X.A-I.7.1.7.1 Prepay-Preset
Purpose of test: check that valve(s) of dispenser will stop transaction at targeted volume with no
unacceptable error above acceptable MPE as per 3.6 of R117-1. Check can be simulated or activated
by special calculator menu, or any special control device on manufacturers test bench
a) if preset function not available for volume, jump to e)
b) Set preset volume to the target check volume (minimum 2 x MMQ). Amount preset here
shall be in correspondence with measuring standard capacity
c) Lift nozzle to start delivery in measuring standard. When delivery is terminated by dispenser
(preset function), hang nozzle and record result of accuracy test and result at display of
dispenser
d) Check accuracy result versus MPE requirements of R117-1 (check 3.6.6)
e) If prepay function not available for price, jump to i)
f) Calculate price prepay target from measuring standard expected volume (minimum 2 x
MMQ). Set prepay price to the target amount. Amount preset here shall be in correspondence
with measuring standard capacity. Some calculation needed with price per liter to be in
correspondence with capacity of measuring standard. Consider rounding.
g) Lift nozzle to start delivery in measuring standard. When delivery is terminated by dispenser
(preset function), hang nozzle and record result and display (price, volume and price per
liter)
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 149 of 181

h) Check accuracy versus MPE requirements of R117-1 (check 3.6.6)


i) record pass/fail result on initial verification paperwork.

X.A-I.7.1.7.2 Printer for dispenser


a) if dispenser equipped with its own printer, this check could take place at the time of any
previous check.
b) Check that ticket issued reflects information of display with no allowed difference
c) record pass/fail result on initial verification paperwork.

X.A-I.7.1.8

Temperature conversion (if applicable)

X.A-I.7.1.8.1 General
a) During check of dispensers with temperature conversion, special function/menu shall be
available to read
Uncompensated volume
Temperature of fuel from EUT probe
Density if applicable
Correction tables or parameters, or signature of used tables
b) Proper correction tables or parameters or signature of tables to be used shall be made
available to the verification operator (eg: corresponding to test fluid in use in factory) so
calibration correction/check can be done properly.
c) Proper training is needed for verification operator to properly assess results
d) record pass/fail result on initial verification paperwork. In case of fail, record reason
X.A-I.7.1.8.2

Test methods

X.A-I.7.1.8.2.1

General

Temperature conversion when applicable (measurement, probe position, see clauses of OIML R1172: 6.3, and OIML R117-1 : 6.1.10 note 3)
X.A-I.7.1.8.2.2

Split EUT verification for first verification

These tests is done to check accurate temperature reading of fluid in EUT


a) Install reference probe (1) at EUT temperature well
b) Disengage temperature correction of EUT (note: refer to manufacturers manual as this
might be the way to have maintenance information displayed on EUT dial such as
temperature of fuel at EUT conversion probe)
c) Run flow through EUT at Qmax from storage tank for at least 3 minutes to stabilize fluid
temperature and EUT temperature (outgoing flow can be re-circulated back to storage tank)
d) Check accurate temperature reading by comparing temperature indicated by EUT (converted
signal from its own temperature probe) with reference reference probe (1) inserted in
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 150 of 181

temperature well close to instrument meter/transducer. Maximum difference allowed is 1.6


C
e) Stop flow
f) Check use of correct conversion table (as per type approval) in conversion (calculator)
arrangement
X.A-I.7.1.9

Self Service devices (SSD)

X.A-I.7.1.9.1 Unattended mode Differed Post payment


When simulation means/tools are used to checks of SSD in factory, the simulation means are most
of the time a set of one to several calculators/indicators organized with simulators for volume and
other arrangements (nozzle switch, status bulbs for motors/valves). Simulation means can also be
fully automated and integrated in one special computer. It is the responsibility of the manufacturer
using such simulation tools to fairly demonstrate that his simulation tools are behaving like
calculators using the considered protocols.
Test shall verify that correct communication and memorizing/printing is achieved with
production instruments.
Example:
a) Initiate a transaction with the dispenser or simulator (usually, done with a credit card
system)
b) Activate a few liters of flow, and hang nozzle
c) Check good transmission of corresponding transaction to the SSD
d) Compare display of dispenser with memorized (or printed when applicable) information
at SSD. This check can be conducted also on ticket printer at credit card payment
terminal when applicable
e) Check good retrieving of last transaction from the SSD memory when applicable
f) record pass/fail result on initial verification paperwork.
X.A-I.7.1.9.2 Attended mode Temporary storage mode Immediate Post payment
When simulation means/tools are used during checks of SSD in factory, the simulation means are
most of the time a set of one to several calculators/indicators organized with simulators for volume
and other arrangements (nozzle switch, status bulbs for motors/valves). Simulation means can also
be fully automated and integrated in one special computer. It is the responsibility of the
manufacturer using such simulation tools to fairly demonstrate that his simulation tools are behaving
like calculators using the considered protocols.

Test shall verify that correct communication and memorizing/printing is achieved with
production instruments
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)

Initiate a transaction with EUT


Activate a few liters of flow, and hang nozzle
Initiate a new transaction with EUT
Activate a few liters of flow (different volume from first transaction), and hang nozzle
Try to initiate a new transaction with EUT it must be impossible (limited stacking to 2
transactions)
f) Check good transmission of corresponding transactions to console/SSD
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 151 of 181

g) Check good retrieving of both transactions from SSD memory when applicable
h) record pass/fail result on initial verification paperwork. In case of fail, record reason

X.A-I.7.2

Initial verification on demand, at place of use

X.A-I.7.2.1 General
a) test fluid: dispensers are tested with fuel to be dispensed.
b) test conditions: environmental conditions (temperature) to be part of uncertainty assessment,
as well as evaporation, wind, misting and potential denting of measuring standards
c) measuring standard : uncertainty and volume of checks to be assessed according to
requirement of R117-1 : 2.5.3
X.A-I.7.2.2 Administrative test
a) verify compliance of design to type approval certificate (reference of certificate is expected
on type approval plate)
b) check that all known metrological components (eg: calculator, meter, air separator) are
referenced in the type approval certificate
c) check that relevant seals are in place and preventing normal dismounting/opening of
associated component (seals do not need to be marked at this time)
d) check that MMQ is properly indicated at dial level
e) check that identification plate(s) is (are) compliant with type certificate information (or
registered design)
f) check that identification plate(s) is (are) seals/attached to dispenser in a durable way
g) record pass/fail result on initial verification paperwork. In case of fail, record reason if
known
X.A-I.7.2.3

Accuracy test at high and low flow

a) disengage temperature conversion if applicable


b) pre-condition measuring standards
c) lift nozzle of EUT, place in measuring standard for high flow, check that display is reset to
zero and stays at zero for 5 seconds, open nozzle to achieve maximum flow rate, carry-out
accuracy test, and hang nozzle
d) record result, and real flowrate
e) check results versus MPE requirements of R117-1, and check that flowrate is between 50%
and 100% of maximum flowrate of type certificate (see also identification plate)
f) lift nozzle of EUT, place in measuring standard for low flow, check that display is reset to
zero and stays at zero for 5 seconds, open nozzle to achieve minimal flow rate (adjust during
flow to stay between 100% and 120% of minimal flow rate of type approval), carry-out
accuracy test, and hang nozzle
g) record result, and real flowrate
h) check results versus MPE requirements of R117-1
i) record pass/fail result on initial verification paperwork. In case of fail, record reason if
known
X.A-I.7.2.4

Accuracy test at MMQ and Hose check

a) disengage temperature conversion if applicable


b) pre-condition measuring standard volume of check will be MMQ
c) disable increment masking feature at calculator
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 152 of 181

d) lift nozzle of EUT, place in measuring standard for high flow, check that display is reset to
zero and stays at zero for 5 seconds, open nozzle to achieve maximum possible flow rate
with no spillage, carry-out accuracy test
e) for gasoline hoses, with vapour recovery: do not hang nozzle but keep nozzle spout out of
measuring standard. Wait for calculator time out (or one minute) to witness any unexpected
extra increment at display. Record result. Unexpected extra increments at display shall not
exceed 1% of MMQ
f) hang nozzle
g) record result of MMQ accuracy check
h) check results versus MPE requirements of R117-1 (see R117-1: 2.5.3)
i) record pass/fail result on initial verification paperwork. In case of fail, record reason if
known

X.A-I.7.2.5 Test of timeout function on dispensers with electronic indicator (see R117-1
section 5.1.15) this test can be replaced by software revision control.
Note: this test only applies to dispensers with electronic indicators.
a) Lift nozzle to activate dispenser
b) do not deliver fuel wait for timeout
c) check that dispenser switches off and terminates transaction within a period not greater
than 120s.
d) Hang nozzle for 5 seconds
e) Lift nozzle to activate dispenser
f) deliver a quantity of fuel into receptacle
g) Stop flow and note time
h) check that dispenser switches off and terminates transaction within a period not greater
than 120s.
i) hang nozzle
j) record result of test of c) and h)
X.A-I.7.2.6

Air elimination check

X.A-I.7.2.6.1 General
Suction line or inlet connected to EUT shall be equipped with a suction air-inlet plug with a
calibrated inlet hole between 1.5 and 2.5mm diameter. Plug shall be equipped with a control valve to
open/close plug to atmosphere. Such can be connected to any drain plug or fitted on a special cover
(eg: special test inlet filter cover). This special air-inlet can be removed after verification on site is
done. When done on site, this test creates a hazardous situation. Operators shall be properly trained
with respect to explosion safety rules and precautions.
X.A-I.7.2.6.2 Alternative 1 air elimination test with result
a) during accuracy test, open the suction air-inlet plug for 15 seconds
b) hang nozzle
c) record accuracy result with of air.
d) check results versus MPE requirements of R117-1 (take in consideration viscosity of fluid or
test-fluid in use if applicable)
X.A-I.7.2.6.3 Alternative 2 - air elimination test with blowing evidence
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 153 of 181

a)
b)
c)
d)
e)

during a test run in a receptable, open the suction air-inlet plug for 15 seconds
check evidence of air blowing out of air-vent of air-separator
hang nozzle
if no air-flow was sensed at air-vent, consider air-separation has failed
record pass/fail result on initial verification paperwork.

X.A-I.7.2.7

Ancillary devices

X.A-I.7.2.7.1 Prepay
a) check of prepay function of dispenser. Check must be activated from console controlling site
b) Set prepay volume to the target check volume (minimum 2 x MMQ) to be done at kiosk of
station
c) Activate at console, walk back to dispenser and carry out accuracy test, record result
d) Check result versus MPE requirements of R117-1
e) record pass/fail result. In case of fail, record reason if known
X.A-I.7.2.7.2 Printer for dispenser
a) if dispenser equipped with its own printer, check could take place during any previous check.
b) Check that ticket issued reflects information of dial with no allowed difference
c) record pass/fail result on initial verification paperwork.
X.A-I.7.2.8

Temperature conversion (if applicable)

X.A-I.7.2.8.1 General
a) During check of dispensers with temperature conversion, special function/menu shall be
available to read
Uncompensated volume
Temperature of fuel from EUT probe
Density if applicable
Correction tables or parameters, or signature of used tables
b) Proper correction tables or parameters or signature of tables to be used shall be made
available to the verification operator (eg: corresponding to test fluid in use in factory) so
calibration correction/check can be done properly.
c) Proper training is needed for verification operator to properly assess results
X.A-I.7.2.8.2

Test methods

X.A-I.7.2.8.2.1

General

Temperature conversion when applicable (measurement, probe position, see clauses of OIML R1172: 6.3, and OIML R117-1 : 6.1.10 note 3)
X.A-I.7.2.8.2.2

Split EUT verification for first verification

These tests is done to check accurate temperature reading of fluid in EUT

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 154 of 181

a) Install reference probe (1) at EUT temperature well


b) Disengage temperature correction of EUT (note: refer to manufacturers manual as this
might be the way to have maintenance information displayed on EUT dial such as
temperature of fuel at EUT conversion probe)
c) Run flow through EUT at Qmax from storage tank for at least 3 minutes to stabilize fluid
temperature and EUT temperature (outgoing flow can be re-circulated back to storage
tank)
d) Check accurate temperature reading by comparing temperature indicated by EUT
(converted signal from its own temperature probe) with reference reference probe (1)
inserted in temperature well close to instrument meter/transducer. Maximum difference
allowed is 1.6 C
e) Stop flow
f) Check use of correct conversion table (as per type approval) in conversion (calculator)
arrangement
X.A-I.7.2.9

Self Service devices

X.A-I.7.2.9.1 Unattended mode Differed Post payment


a) Initiate a transaction with the connected dispenser (usually, done with a credit card system)
b) Activate a few liters of flow, and hang nozzle
c) Check good transmission of corresponding transaction to the SSD
d) Compare display of dispenser with memorized (or printed when applicable) information at
SSD. This check can be conducted also on ticket printer at credit card payment terminal
when applicable
e) Check good retrieving of last transaction from the SSD memory when applicable
f) record pass/fail result on initial verification paperwork. In case of fail, record reason
X.A-I.7.2.9.2 Attended mode Temporary storage mode Immediate Post payment
a) Initiate a transaction with EUT
b) Activate a few liters of flow, and hang nozzle
c) Initiate a new transaction with EUT
d) Activate a few liters of flow (different volume from first transaction), and hang nozzle
e) Try to initiate a new transaction with EUT it must be impossible (limited stacking to 2
transactions)
f) Check good transmission of corresponding transactions to console/SSD
g) Check good retrieving of both transactions from SSD memory when applicable
h) record pass/fail result on initial verification paperwork. In case of fail, record reason.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 155 of 181

Annex X.A-LPG
Testing procedures (initial verification) for LPG dispensers
Definitions for the purpose of this annex (note to reader: these could migrate to the beginning or
R117-2 after review):
Dynamic flow corrected meters: a meter associated with its transducer, where correction factors
linked to flow rate are used to adjust measurement dependently (2 or more factors to optimized the
accuracy curve of the measuring system over the flow rate range)
Measuring standard: generic term to designate the adequate tools (and process) in use to check
accuracy of instrument/meter (see note 2). Special care shall be taken to properly assess the ratio of the
mix of Butane and Propane in use for any test if it can influence accuracy of measuring standards.
Console: an ancillary device control system, not in the scope of the type certification, capable of
setting the unit price to the dispenser and controlling various phases in self-serving mode on petrol
stations (releasing a dispenser, cash-in a dispenser, stop a dispenser, changing price of LPG fuel)
using the communication protocol with the dispenser calculator
LPG dispenser: are considered as LPG dispensers in this annex all commonly used fuel or liquid
dispensers where liquid has a saturating vapor pressure above atmospheric pressure at ambient
temperature (example is DMF). This included equipment on petrol stations and also used to feed
boat or small aircraft, when operation of these is done hose full.

X.A-L-I.7

General Information for initial verification Preamble

Initial verification of fuel dispensers is the responsibility of national authorities, and may be done
either:
a) At factory of manufacturer,
under quality insurance control, if permitted by the national authority of the country
of use;
by inspection of apparatus, routine or batch sample, as per regulation of country of
use, done by authorized inspection organization
b) At site of use. Common practice is for national authorities to perform this, unless it is
subcontracted to an approved/authorized representative of manufacturer or authority.
Note: The expression measuring standard will be used here to replace any of the
possible tools used such as (with no prejudice to validation of such tool and process
to be adequate for the test and pre-conditioning such tools).

X.A-L-I.7.1

Initial verification at manufacturers premises

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 156 of 181

a) test fluid: use of any substitute fluid for testing shall be validated with fuel comparison data
to assess resulting uncertainties
b) test conditions: environmental conditions (temperature) to be part of uncertainty assessment
c) measuring standard (proving cans/verification standards/weighting system): uncertainty and
delivery volume are to be assessed according to requirement of R117-1 : 2.5.3
d) Sampling and/or split verification (eg: separate component check prior to integration in
dispenser). It is allowed to perform tests at earlier stages of manufacturing process (eg:
testing 100% of meters individually before integration in dispensers, testing 100% of
calculators on simulators, testing 100% of air-separation on special test bench, testing 100%
of SSDs) as long as the manufactured dispensers or SSDs are checked under a statistical
(minimal 10% of manufactured population) or systematic survey at final test.

X.A-L-I.7.1.1) Administrative verification


a) verify compliance of design to type approval certificate/number (reference to certificate shall
be on type approval plate as per R117-1 section 2.19.1 and 2.19.2, and on manufacturing
relevant paperwork)
b) check that all metrological components (eg: calculator, meter, air separator when applicable)
are referenced in the type approval certificate
c) check that required seals are in place and preventing normal dismounting/opening of
associated component (seals do not need to be marked at this time)
d) check that MMQ is clearly indicated in normal conditions of use (see R117-1 section 2.19.1)
at dial level
e) check that identification plate(s) is (are) compliant with type approval certificate information
(or registered design) and contain markings required in R117-1 section 2.19
f) check that identification plate(s) is (are) sealed/attached to dispenser in a durable way
g) record pass/fail result on initial verification paperwork. In case of fail, record reason

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 157 of 181

X.A-L-I.7.1.2) Accuracy test at high and low flow process for fully assembled dispensers
Note: If meters are individually tested before dispenser assembly, this process shall
be fully described in the manufacturers quality plan.
Adequate meter individual test upstream manufacturing flow must be integrated in
manufacturers quality plan.
a) Disengage temperature conversion if applicable
b) Pre-condition measuring standard
c) lift nozzle of EUT, place in inlet of measuring standard for high flow, check that display is
reset to zero and stays at zero for 5 seconds, activate flow (dead man push button if needed)
to achieve maximum flow rate, carry out accuracy test, and hang nozzle
d) record result, and actual flowrate of test done
e) check results versus MPE requirements of R117-1 section 2.6.1 line A of table 2, and check
that flowrate is between 80% and 100% of maximum flowrate of type certificate (see also
identification plate)
f) Set flow valve arrangement (eg: valve between nozzle and hose) for low flow.
g) lift nozzle of EUT, place in inlet of measuring standard for low flow, check that display is
reset to zero and stays at zero for 5 seconds, activate flow (dead man push button if needed)
to achieve minimal flow rate (adjust during flow to stay between 100% and 120% of
minimal flow rate of type approval), carry out accuracy test, and hang nozzle
h) record result, and actual flowrate of test done
i) check results versus MPE requirements of R117-1 section 2.6.1 line A of table 2
j) record pass/fail result on initial verification paperwork. In case of fail, record reason if
known.
Note: during test b) and e), volume of delivery shall be at least 2 times the MMQ (see R117-1
section 2.5.1).
X.A-L-I.7.1.3 Accuracy test at MMQ
a)
b)
c)
d)

e)
f)
g)
h)

Disengage temperature conversion if applicable


pre-condition measuring standards - volume of test shall be MMQ
disable increment masking feature at calculator
lift nozzle of EUT, connect to measuring standard for MMQ, check that display is reset to
zero and stays at zero for 5 seconds, activate flow to achieve maximum possible flow rate,
execute accuracy test
hang nozzle
record result of MMQ check
check results versus MPE requirements of R117-1 (see R117-1: 2.5.3)
record pass/fail result on initial verification paperwork. In case of fail, record reason if
known

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 158 of 181

X.A-L-I.7.1.4 Check of hose dilation and draining (see R117-1 sections 2.13.6 and 2.15)
X.A-L-I.7.1.4.1 General
The purpose of this section is to check hose dilation and nozzle anti-draining device as well as
means to prevent reverse flow to meter. All applicable steps of this section shall be carried out in
sequence, with not more than 3 minutes between each sub-sections of X.A-L-I.7.1.4.
X.A-L-I.7.1.4.2

Hose dilation

a) if electronic calculator, unmask small increments at display


b) lift nozzle and do not extend/extract hose from dispenser (use actual free reach of hose),
activate flow while nozzle not connected (dead man push button if needed) and observe
display for 30 seconds. Read display after 30 seconds (HD1). Check volume HD1 against
MPE for hose dilation over MMQ. Record HD1 and MMQ.
c) Release dead man push button
X.A-L-I.7.1.4.3

Draining (procedure from A.7.1.4.2 continues here)

a) connect nozzle to storage return line (or any compatible liquid vessel)
b) activate nozzle switch without hanging nozzle (simulate nozzle back in nozzle boot to
terminate transaction), and observe potential liquid drainage from nozzle spout for 1 minute
c) Release nozzle boot switch to start a new transaction and observe display for 30 seconds.
Display shall reset first and then dispenser shall start new transaction. Read display after 30
seconds (HD2). Check volume HD2 against MPE for hose dilation over MMQ. Record HD2.
d) place nozzle back in nozzle boot to terminate transaction
X.A-L-I.7.1.4.4

Hose dilation with hose reel (if applicable, in continuation of A.7.1.4.3)

a) while keeping nozzle in nozzle boot, uncoil hose full length (on floor if needed, this action
might require special tools such as clamps or locking devices if hose retractor is automatic)
b) lift nozzle, do not connect nozzle, activate flow (dead man push button if needed) and
observe display for 30 seconds. Display shall reset first and then dispenser shall start new
transaction. Read display after 30 seconds (HD3). Check volume HD3 against MPE for hose
dilation over MMQ. Record HD3.
X.A-L-I.7.1.4.5

Draining (procedure from A.7.1.4.4 continues here)

a) connect nozzle to storage return line (or any compatible liquid vessel)
b) activate nozzle switch without hanging nozzle (simulate nozzle back in nozzle boot to
terminate transaction), and observe potential liquid drainage from nozzle spout for 1 minute
c) Release nozzle boot switch to start a new transaction and observe display for 30 seconds.
Display shall reset first and then dispenser shall start new transaction. Read display after 30
seconds (HD2). Check volume HD2 against MPE for hose dilation over MMQ. Record HD2.
d) place nozzle back in nozzle boot to terminate transaction

X.A-L-I.7.1.5 Test of timeout function on dispensers with electronic indicator (see R117-1
section 5.1.15)
Note 1: This test can be replaced by software revision control.
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 159 of 181

Note 2: this test only applies to dispensers with electronic indicators.


a) Lift nozzle to activate dispenser
b) do not deliver fuel wait for timeout
c) check that dispenser switches off and terminates transaction within a period not greater
than 120s.
d) Hang nozzle for 5 seconds
e) Lift nozzle to activate dispenser
f) Connect nozzle to storage tank return line and deliver a quantity of fuel
g) Stop flow and note time
h) check that dispenser switches off and terminates transaction within a period not greater
than 120s.
i) hang nozzle
j) record result of test of c) and h)
X.A-L-I.7.1.6 Air elimination check - process for fully assembled dispensers
Warning note: this test can only be achieved with actual LPG fuel. If low saturating pressure
substitute fluid used, this test shall be adjusted, see note (below).
a) liquid pressurized line connected to EUT shall enter the EUT via an electric controlled
valve, activated by operators request for flow (dead man push button if needed).
b) During idle state, remaining liquid LPG is allowed to boil back to storage tank via storage
tank return line for safety reasons. Purpose of this test ist o make sure that volume of LPG
under gaseous phase will not alter the accuracy oft he measuring system at next transaction.
c) pre-condition measuring standard volume of check will be 20 liters minimal
d) Leave EUT idle for 3 minutes (relaxing time for air-separator to boil liquid back to storage
tank)
e) lift nozzle of EUT while keeping nozzle switch of boot activated (to prevent pump
activation), connect to measuring standardl for high flow,
f) Activate flow simultanasly releasing nozzle boot switch. check that display is reset to zero
and stays at zero for 5 seconds, activate flow immediatly to achieve maximum possible flow
rate with no spillage, execute accuracy check. Result shall be within MPE for air-elimination
Note: if using low saturating pressure substitute fluid, step d) is replaced by step d) (as
follows)
d) flush the air separator with nitrogen at high flow so that the liquid inside air separator is
expelled back to storage tank.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 160 of 181

X.A-L-I.7.1.7 Ancillary devices


X.A-L-I.7.1.7.1

Prepay-Preset (when applicable)

Purpose of test: check that valve(s) of LPG dispenser will stop transaction at targeted volume with
no unacceptable error above acceptable MPE as per 3.6 of R117-1. Check can be simulated or
activated by special calculator menu, or any special control device on manufacturers test bench
a) if preset function not available for volume, jump to e)
b) Set preset volume to the target check volume (minimum 2 x MMQ). Amount preset here
shall be in correspondence with measuring standard capacity
c) Connect nozzle to start delivery in measuring standard. When delivery is terminated by
dispenser (preset function), hang nozzle and record result of accuracy test and result at
display of dispenser
d) Check accuracy result versus MPE requirements of R117-1 (check 3.6.6)
e) If prepay function not available for price, jump to i)
f) Calculate price prepay target from measuring standard expected volume (minimum 2 x
MMQ). Set prepay price to the target amount. Amount preset here shall be in correspondence
with measuring standard capacity. Some calculation needed with price per liter to be in
correspondence with capacity of measuring standard. Consider rounding.
g) Lift nozzle to start delivery in measuring standard. When delivery is terminated by dispenser
(preset function), hang nozzle and record result and display (price, volume and price per
liter)
h) Check accuracy versus MPE requirements of R117-1 (check 3.6.6)
i) record pass/fail result on initial verification paperwork.

X.A-L-I.7.1.7.2

Printer for dispenser

a) if dispenser equipped with its own printer, this check could take place at the time of any
previous check.
b) Check that ticket issued reflects information of display with no allowed difference
c) record pass/fail result on initial verification paperwork.

X.A-L-I.7.1.8

Temperature conversion (if applicable)

X.A-L-I.7.1.8.1

General

a) During check of LPG dispensers with temperature conversion, special function/menu shall
be available to read
b) Uncompensated volume
c) Temperature of LPG fuel from EUT probe
d) Density if applicable
e) Correction tables or parameters, or signature of used tables
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 161 of 181

f) Proper correction tables or parameters or signature of tables to be used shall be made


available to the verification operator (eg: corresponding to test fluid in use in factory) so
calibration correction/check can be done properly.
g) Proper training is needed for verification operator to properly assess results
h) record pass/fail result on initial verification paperwork. In case of fail, record reason
X.A-L-I.7.1.8.2

Test methods

X.A-L-I.7.1.8.2.1

General

Temperature conversion when applicable (measurement, probe position, see clauses of OIML R1172: 6.3, and OIML R117-1 : 6.1.10 note 3)
X.A-L-I.7.1.8.2.2

Split EUT verification for first verification

These tests is done to check accurate temperature reading of fluid in EUT


a) Install reference probe (1) at EUT temperature well
b) Disengage temperature correction of EUT (note: refer to manufacturers manual as this
might be the way to have maintenance information displayed on EUT dial such as
temperature of LPG fuel at EUT conversion probe)
c) Connect nozzle to storage tank return line. Run flow through EUT at Qmax from storage
tank for at least 3 minutes to stabilize fluid temperature and EUT temperature (outgoing flow
can be re-circulated back to storage tank)
d) Check accurate temperature reading by comparing temperature indicated by EUT (converted
signal from its own temperature probe) with reference reference probe (1) inserted in
temperature well close to instrument meter/transducer. Maximum difference allowed is 1.3
C
e) Stop flow
f) Check use of correct conversion table (as per type approval) in conversion (calculator)
arrangement
X.A-L-I.7.1.9

Self Service devices (SSD)

X.A-L-I.7.1.9.1

Unattended mode Differed Post payment

When simulation means/tools are used to checks of SSD in factory, the simulation means are most
of the time a set of one to several calculators/indicators organized with simulators for volume and
other arrangements (nozzle switch, status bulbs for motors/valves). Simulation means can also be
fully automated and integrated in one special computer. It is the responsibility of the manufacturer
using such simulation tools to fairly demonstrate that his simulation tools are behaving like
calculators using the considered protocols.
Test shall verify that correct communication and memorizing/printing is achieved with production
instruments.
Example:
a) Initiate a transaction with EUT (usually, done with a credit card system)
b) Activate a few liters of flow, and hang nozzle
c) Check good transmission of corresponding transaction
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 162 of 181

d) Compare display of dispenser with memorized (or printed when applicable) information at
SSD. This check can be conducted also on ticket printer at credit card payment terminal
when applicable
e) Check good retrieving of last transaction for SSD memory when applicable
f) record pass/fail result on initial verification paperwork.
X.A-L-I.7.1.9.2

Attended mode Sale stacking Immediate Post payment

When simulation means/tools are used during checks of SSD in factory, the simulation means are
most of the time a set of one to several calculators/indicators organized with simulators for volume
and other arrangements (nozzle switch, status bulbs for motors/valves). Simulation means can also
be fully automated and integrated in one special computer. It is the responsibility of the
manufacturer using such simulation tools to fairly demonstrate that his simulation tools are behaving
like calculators using the considered protocols.
Test shall verify that correct communication and memorizing/printing is achieved with
production instruments
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)

Initiate a transaction with EUT


Activate a few liters of flow, and hang nozzle
Initiate a new transaction with EUT
Activate a few liters of flow (different volume from first transaction), and hang nozzle
Try to initiate a new transaction with EUT it must be impossible (limited stacking to 2
transactions)
f) Check good transmission of corresponding transactions to console/SSD
g) Check good retrieving of both transactions from SSD memory when applicable
h) record pass/fail result on initial verification paperwork. In case of fail, record reason

X.A-L-I.7.2

Initial verification on demand, at place of use

X.A-L-I.7.2.1 General
a) test fluid: dispensers are tested with fuel to be dispensed.
b) test conditions: environmental conditions (temperature) to be part of uncertainty assessment,
as well as evaporation, wind, misting and potential denting of measuring standards
c) measuring standard : uncertainty and volume of checks to be assessed according to
requirement of R117-1 : 2.5.3

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 163 of 181

X.A-L-I.7.2.2 Administrative test


a) verify compliance of design to type approval certificate (reference of certificate is expected
on type approval plate)
b) check that all known metrological components (eg: calculator, meter, air separator) are
referenced in the type approval certificate
c) check that relevant seals are in place and preventing normal dismounting/opening of
associated component (seals do not need to be marked at this time)
d) check that MMQ is properly indicated at dial level
e) check that identification plate(s) is (are) compliant with type certificate information (or
registered design)
f) check that identification plate(s) is (are) seals/attached to dispenser in a durable way
g) record pass/fail result on initial verification paperwork. In case of fail, record reason if
known
X.A-L-I.7.2.3

Accuracy test at high and low flow

a) disengage temperature conversion if applicable


b) pre-condition measuring standards
c) lift nozzle of EUT, connect nozzle to measuring standard for high flow, check that display is
reset to zero and stays at zero for 5 seconds, open nozzle to achieve maximum flow rate,
carry-out accuracy test, and hang nozzle
d) record result, and real flowrate
e) check results versus MPE requirements of R117-1, and check that flowrate is between 50%
and 100% of maximum flowrate of the type certificate (see also identification plate)
f) lift nozzle of EUT, connect to measuring standard for low flow (see note), check that display
is reset to zero and stays at zero for 5 seconds, open nozzle to achieve minimal flow rate
(adjust during flow to stay between 100% and 120% of minimal flow rate of type approval),
carry-out accuracy test, and hang nozzle
g) record result, and real flowrate
h) check results versus MPE requirements of R117-1
i) record pass/fail result on initial verification paperwork. In case of fail, record reason if
known
Note 1: to adjust low flow, the operation might require a special adjusting valve at the entry
port of the measuring standard to avoid modifications to the EUT hose/nozzle arrangement.
Note 2: The target of 50% of point e) might be difficult to match on site with the temperature
of vapours in receiving tank.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 164 of 181

X.A-L-I.7.2.4
a)
b)
c)
d)

e)
f)
g)
h)

Accuracy test at MMQ (if applicable) and Hose check

disengage temperature conversion if applicable


pre-condition measuring standard volume of check will be MMQ
disable increment masking feature at calculator
lift nozzle of EUT, connect to measuring standard for high flow, check that display is reset to
zero and stays at zero for 5 seconds, activate flow (eg: dead man push button), carry-out
accuracy test
hang nozzle
record result of MMQ accuracy check
check results versus MPE requirements of R117-1 (see R117-1: 2.5.3)
record pass/fail result on initial verification paperwork. In case of fail, record reason if
known

X.A-L-I.7.2.5
Test of timeout function on dispensers with electronic indicator (see
R117-1 section 5.1.15)
Note 1: This test can be replaced by software revision control.
Note 2: this test only applies to dispensers with electronic indicators.
a) Lift nozzle to activate dispenser
b) do not deliver fuel wait for timeout
c) check that dispenser switches off and terminates transaction within a period not greater
than 120s.
d) Hang nozzle for 5 seconds
e) Lift nozzle to activate dispenser and connect to storage tank return line
f) deliver a quantity of fuel
g) Stop flow and note time
h) check that dispenser switches off and terminates transaction within a period not greater
than 120s.
i) hang nozzle
j) record result of test of c) and h)

X.A-L-I.7.2.6

Air elimination check

a) liquid pressurized line connected to EUT shall enter the EUT via an electric controlled
valve, activated by operators request for flow (dead man push button if needed).
b) During idle state, remaining liquid LPG is allowed to boil back to storage tank via storage
tank return line for safety reasons. Purpose of this test ist o make sure that volume of LPG
under gaseous phase will not alter the accuracy oft he measuring system at next transaction.
c) pre-condition measuring standard volume of check will be 20 liters minimal
d) Leave EUT idle for 3 minutes (relaxing time for air-separator to boil liquid back to storage
tank)
e) lift nozzle of EUT while keeping nozzle switch of boot activated (to prevent pump
activation), connect to measuring standardl for high flow,
f) Activate flow simultanasly releasing nozzle boot switch. check that display is reset to zero
and stays at zero for 5 seconds, activate flow immediatly to achieve maximum possible flow
rate with no spillage, execute accuracy check. Result shall be within MPE for air-elimination
X.A-L-I.7.2.7

Ancillary devices

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 165 of 181

X.A-L-I.7.2.7.1

Prepay

a) check of prepay function of dispenser. Check must be activated from console controlling site
b) Set prepay volume to the target check volume (minimum 2 x MMQ) to be done at kiosk of
station
c) Activate at console, walk back to dispenser and carry out accuracy test, record result
d) Check result versus MPE requirements of R117-1
e) record pass/fail result. In case of fail, record reason if known

X.A-L-I.7.2.7.2

Printer for dispenser

a) if dispenser equipped with its own printer, check could take place during any previous check.
b) Check that ticket issued reflects information of dial with no allowed difference
c) record pass/fail result on initial verification paperwork.
X.A-L-I.7.2.8

Temperature conversion (if applicable)

X.A-L-I.7.2.8.1

General

a) During check of dispensers with temperature conversion, special function/menu shall be


available to read
b) Uncompensated volume
c) Temperature of fuel from EUT probe
d) Density if applicable
e) Correction tables or parameters, or signature of used tables
f) Proper correction tables or parameters or signature of tables to be used shall be made
available to the verification operator (eg: corresponding to fluid) so calibration
correction/check can be done properly.
g) Proper training is needed for verification operator to properly assess results
X.A-L-I.7.2.8.2

Test methods

X.A-L-I.7.2.8.2.1

General

Temperature conversion when applicable (measurement, probe position, see clauses of OIML R1172: 6.3, and OIML R117-1 : 6.1.10 note 3)

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 166 of 181

X.A-L-I.7.2.8.2.2

Split EUT verification for first verification

These tests is done to check accurate temperature reading of fluid in EUT


a) Install reference probe (1) at EUT temperature well
b) Disengage temperature correction of EUT (note: refer to manufacturers manual as this
might be the way to have maintenance information displayed on EUT dial such as
temperature of fuel at EUT conversion probe)
c) Run flow through EUT at Qmax from storage tank for at least 3 minutes to stabilize fluid
temperature and EUT temperature (outgoing flow can be re-circulated back to storage tank)
d) Check accurate temperature reading by comparing temperature indicated by EUT (converted
signal from its own temperature probe) with reference reference probe (1) inserted in
temperature well close to instrument meter/transducer. Maximum difference allowed is 1.3
C
e) Stop flow
f) Check use of correct conversion table (as per type approval) in conversion (calculator)
arrangement

X.A-L-I.7.2.9

Self Service devices

X.A-L-I.7.2.9.1

Unattended mode Differed Post payment

a)
b)
c)
d)

Initiate a transaction with EUT (usually, done with a credit card system)
Activate a few liters of flow, and hang nozzle
Check good transmission of corresponding transaction
Compare display of dispenser with memorized (or printed when applicable) information at
SSD. This check can be conducted also on ticket printer at credit card payment terminal
when applicable
e) Check good retrieving of last transaction for SSD memory when applicable
f) record pass/fail result on initial verification paperwork. In case of fail, record reason

X.A-L-I.7.2.9.2

Attended mode Sale stacking Immediate Post payment

a)
b)
c)
d)
e)

Initiate a transaction with EUT


Activate a few liters of flow, and hang nozzle
Initiate a new transaction with EUT
Activate a few liters of flow (different volume from first transaction), and hang nozzle
Try to initiate a new transaction with EUT it must be impossible (limited stacking to 2
transactions)
f) Check good transmission of corresponding transactions to console/SSD
g) Check good retrieving of both transactions from SSD memory when applicable
h) record pass/fail result on initial verification paperwork. In case of fail, record reason

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 167 of 181

Annex X.E
- Test procedures for measuring systems (MS)
for milk, beer and other foaming potable liquids (see R117-1, 5.6)
Technical aspects of the MS are explained thus leading to a better understanding in order to perform the
tests correctly and to identify problems, when an irregular performance of a MS occurs.
Technical aspects of milk MS
While MS for the delivery of milk closely resemble, in their technical design, conventional MS for the
delivery of liquid petroleum and related products, in MS for the reception of milk the transfer point is
defined by a constant level tank upstream of the meter. The air elimination device makes use of the
constant level tank and is usually combined in one device; the air elimination device may be separate if
it is downstream of the constant level tank and before the meter. The level in the constant level tank
before and after each measurement is established automatically.
Milk MS on road tankers and fixed milk MS (both for the reception) are usually designed in the same
way, but the delivery line of a MS on a road tanker leads to a reception tank above the level of the
meter (so that the meter will never run empty), whereas the delivery line of a stationary MS may lead to
a reception tank beneath the level of the meter; in this case, means in the delivery line are provided (eg
a pressure maintaining valve, a special pipe geometry) which prevent the meter from running empty
(see OIML R 117-1 clause 5.6.2.6).
Main operational principles for the reception:
- Suction of milk from a supply tank (milk churns, containers) into the air elimination device by a
vacuum unit and transfer of milk from the air elimination device by a pump through the meter to the
reception tank (see fig.1a).

fig.1a - principal instrumentation of a milk measuring system, with suction by vacuum


OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 168 of 181

- Suction of milk from a supply tank (milk churns, containers) by a pump and transfer of milk into
the air elimination device and from the air elimination device through the meter to the reception tank
(see fig.1b).

fig. 1b principal instrumentation of a milk measuring system with suction by pump

- Suction of milk from a supply tank (milk churns, containers) into the air elimination device by a
vacuum unit and transfer of milk from the air elimination device by a pump through the meter to the
reception tank. The air elimination device still acts as a transfer point, but air bubbles may pass it and
enter the meter, but are registered by the sensors for the adequate correction of the liquid volume (see
fig.1c).
Note: Although this operational principle of a gas elimination device does not comply with a
device described in R117-1, 5.6.2 (constant level air elimination system upstream of the meter),
R117 is not intended to prevent the development of new technologies. Therefore, this
operational principle is acceptable in the case where it yields equivalent results when tested
under the same conditions as air elimination devices described in R117-1, 5.6.2.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 169 of 181

fig.1c - principal instrumentation of a milk measuring system with bubble sensors

Specific instrumentation of a milk MS (given here in order of their installation)


- Suction lines
The suction lines are automatically emptied at the finish of the reception. They are either designed as a
rigid suction pipe connected to a flexible hose (to receive milk from milk churns) or as a flexible hose
with a flange (for coupling the hose to a supply tank).
The hoses are reinforced and must allow the drainage at the finish of the reception.
A MS may have more than only one suction line (in such a case the suction lines are interlocked against
simultaneous usage).
A suction line may have one or several diversion lines (eg for pumping the milk by the aid of the pump
of the MS into a trailer); such diversion lines are locked during the reception (the interlock shall be
verified).
A suction line may have a connection with a manual valve (for emptying and rinsing)
Possible problems:
(Small) cracks in the hoses and defect gaskets at the couplings/joints of the hoses generate air bubbles
which cannot be removed by the air elimination device; an unusual quantity of foam is present in the
air elimination device at the end of a transaction (visible through the sight glass of the air
elimination device).
- Sampling systems (usually arranged in the suction line)
For quality investigations (eg fat content, contamination) the MS usually have devices in the suction
line which automatically divert a small volume sample from the received quantity.
Examples of the design of sampling systems:
- A pre-determined volume is diverted into a container where the milk is stirred, and after
diverting a small volume of the stirred milk into a flask -, returned to the MS upstream of the
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 170 of 181

meter (the return may also be accomplished after the set of the level in the air elimination device,
so that the pump will be re-started for a short period to take over the diverted quantity.
- The product sample is diverted by a pump (which is controlled by the meter of the MS or by an
additional meter/sensor mounted in the suction line) and directly injected into a sample vial.
- Temperature sensor(s)
Only for documentation, not under metrological control.
Possibly installed in the suction line.
- Pumps
Pumps on road tankers are driven either by the auxiliary drive of the vehicles gearbox or by an electric
motor connected to an exterior power supply.
Fig.1a, 1c show how the milk is sucked into the air elimination device by a vacuum (generated e.g. by
one or more ejectors, by a vacuum pump). A pump located downstream of the air elimination device
(usually rotary pump, not self-priming) transfers the milk through the meter into the reception tank,
until the reception comes to its finish and the level at the air elimination device is set to the transfer
point. The pump is controlled automatically by the filling level in the air elimination device.
Fig. 1b shows how the milk is pumped into the air elimination device by a pump located upstream of
the air elimination device (usually impeller centrifugal pump = vane type pump, self-priming). The
pump transfers the milk through the air elimination device and the meter into the reception tank, until
the reception comes to its finish and the level at the air elimination device is set to the transfer point.
The pump is controlled automatically by the filling level in the air elimination device.
Possible problems:
- A leaky shaft-seal of the pump generates small air bubbles which cannot be removed by the air
elimination device; an unusual quantity of foam is present in the air elimination device at the end
of a transaction (visible through the sight glass of the air elimination device).
-

Increasing the speed of the pump (which on road tankers is driven by the auxiliary drive of the
vehicles gear) may lead to a flowrate outside of the approved flowrate range.
Increasing the speed of the pump may cause a mixture of air and milk which is outside the approved
capability of air elimination device.
Gears for driving the pump (by their auxiliary drive) may be constructed in this way that they can split
the gears, so that 2 different speeds of the auxiliary drive are settable. Therefore, care shall be taken to
set the gear such that during the tests the maximum possible flowrate is achieved.
- Control units for the transaction procedure
The control of sensors, activators and pumps as well as the selection and control of the path of the
liquid is usually performed by a store-programmed control (SPC) which may either be designed as a
separate unit or may be incorporated into the software/hardware part of the ECID.
For the correct interaction of all parts of the instrumentation leading to a correct performance of the
MS, the SPC has a complex system of settable parameters (e.g. parameters for pressure control of the
vacuum, pump speed depending on the filling level at the air elimination device, time variables for
pump follow-up).
temporary note: Although some of these parameters may be sensitive to the performance of the
MS and must not be changed after the test it is common practice not to secure them in the SPC
against unauthorised modification
At any rate it must be possible to secure device specific parameters (such as the calibration factor of the
meter, ID of the measuring system and its components, settings of a dip stick in the air elimination
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 171 of 181

device, volume required to fill the measuring system - colloquially called flood volume or dry start
priming volume) against unauthorized modification.
It may happen that during the tests a reduction of the flowrate (e.g. by the control unit, by the ratio of
the gear) yields better measuring results, but the MS in service is operated at higher flowrates; therefore
care shall be taken that the tests are performed at the maximum attainable flowrate of the MS.
- Air elimination device
For the elimination of air, R117-1 requires the following devices:
A gas separator shall be provided when the pressure at the pump inlet may, even momentarily, fall
below the atmospheric pressure (the liquid does not supply the pump by gravity).
Example:
- MS with pumped flow, with an underground supply tank,
- MS with pumped flow, with an overground supply tank, but with supply lines above the level of
the supply tank,
- MS with pumped flow, with a low suction head,
when the pump is of the self priming type. Centrifugal pumps and vane type pumps are usually of
the non-self priming type, but may also be designed as a self priming type.
As an alternative solution for a gas separator the manufacturer may present e.g.
- a pressure sensor monitoring that the pressure is always above the atmospheric pressure,
- an air detector with a venting device.
A gas extractor shall be provided when the pressure at the pump inlet is always greater than the
atmospheric pressure , and if air pockets liable to have a specific effect greater than 1 % of the
MMQ can occur (if such air pockets can also occur at flow conditions under which a gas separator is
mandatory, this gas separator shall also be approved as a gas extractor). Air pockets are likely to be
introduced into the pipework when the supply tank becomes empty. .
A special gas extractor, mainly used for delivery MS on road tankers, is principally intended to
prevent measurement errors which may arise from the complete emptying of one compartment. It
must also separate and continuously remove introduced air, although to a lesser degree than a gas
separator. Installing a special gas extractor is subject to supply conditions.
R117-1, 2.10.2 and 2.10.3 also consider supply conditions under which an air elimination device is
not needed at all, especially when the meter is supplied by gravity without the use of a pump. But
even then, the pressure at the meter inlet may fall below the atmospheric pressure, e.g. when the
inlet line of the meter bears constrictions < nominal diameter of the meter inlet.
Please note that R117-1, 2.10 does not state any further requirements on the performance of air
elimination devices except that the air must be evacuated automatically unless a device is provided
which automatically either stops or sufficiently reduces the flow of liquid when there is a risk of air
entering the meter (R117-1, 2.10.7.1). This requirement is met by types of air elimination devices,
which close a valve downstream of the meter during the evacuation of air.
Air elimination devices are usually designed as a tank serving as an air elimination device with a builtin constant level tank (which serves as the transfer point) and located upstream of the meter. The level
is established automatically.
Usually, the constant level at the transfer point before and after the measurement can be monitored by a
sight glass with two marks (the level is considered to be constant when it settles within the two marks);
some types of air elimination devices have a built-in automatic level gauge (e.g. designed as a dip
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 172 of 181

stick) which measures the level before and after the transaction and provide an adequate volume
correction so that it is not necessary to visually check the constant level before and after each reception.
The volume required to fill the MS (colloquially called flood volume or dry start priming volume)
is either stored as a parameter in the ECID or marked on the name plate of the MS.
De-gassing lines of the air elimination device usually do not have any closure devices being operated
manually.
Instead of the air elimination device described above, the MS may have device serving as a transfer
point together with bubble sensors (see fig. 1c).
The transfer point device controls the intake process at the start and finish of the transaction; when air
bubbles pass the transfer point device they are registered by the bubble sensor (located at the inlet side
of the pump), which adjusts the pump speed accordingly, and are quantified by the second bubble
sensor (located at the outlet side of the meter) with an adequate correction of the milk volume.
The SW of the calculation program of the bubble sensor is subject to metrological control and shall be
validated and secured.
Note: Although this principle of a gas elimination device does not comply with the devices
mentioned in R117-1, 2.10 and 5.6, R117 does not intend to prevent new technologies (see
R117-1, 1.1 and B.2.10.2).
In order to minimise mixing when receiving different grades of milk, an MS may have two air
elimination devices (see fig.2), supplied by either a common suction line or by 2 suction lines, and
connected to one meter.
In MS with two air elimination devices, different flood volumes may occur.

fig. 2 principal instrumentation of a milk MS with two air elimination devices


Possible problems:
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 173 of 181

Because air elimination devices are sensitive to the used product (cream and foam in the air
elimination device may hamper its correct function, especially when it contains mechanical parts
such as a floater), only accuracy tests with the intended liquid will yield representative results, but
not accuracy tests with water.
The suction of milk having been stored without stirring and pumping generates solid substances and
consequently a malfunction of the air elimination device (measurement errors, repeatability
problems). Milk beneath 5 C or skim milk generates foam and consequently a malfunction of the
air elimination device.

- Meters
For the ease of cleaning of the MS (cleaning in process - CIP) usually electromagnetic meters are
installed.
Electromagnetic meters can be tested on a test bench with water; the usage of milk will then shift the
error curve approximately by + 0,15 % (this difference is not due to viscosity and density, but probably
due to a microfilm of fat on the meter walls including electrodes, which changes somewhat the
conductivity).
- Equipment for the complete filling
A non-return valve between the air elimination device/constant level tank and the meter, to prevent
backflow from the meter (eg in cases when the meter is located above the transfer point).
A non-return valve between the meter and receiving tank (in order to prevent reverse flow over the
meter), optionally combined with a pressure maintaining valve (in order to care for a proper setting of
the liquid level in the constant level tank).
Possible problems:
A leakage of the non-return valve (e.g. due to the suction of gasket parts from the upstream pipes)
leads to not repeatable measurement results and/or changes of the liquid level in the sight glass
(remedy by dismounting the non-return valve and cleaning it).
Sight glass at the outlet side of the meter.
- Branches
Optionally, MS on road tankers have a branch to transport milk from their reception tank to a trailer
(see fig.3):
The milk is sucked from the delivery line via an own pipe to the suction side of the pump and delivered
via a connection downstream of the pump. Valves with an automatic interlock safeguard that this
transfer has no influence on the normal operation of the MS.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 174 of 181

fig.3 principal instrumentation of a milk MS, with transfer line from tank to trailer

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 175 of 181

Technical aspects of MS for beer and other foaming potable liquids


MS on road tankers and stationary MS are usually designed in a similar way.
They are mainly designed for the delivery, but may also be foreseen for the reception under
metrological control.
The MS are full hose systems. The nozzle at the end of the hose is the transfer point.
For the purpose of conservation, beer and other foaming potable liquids contain carbonic acid. Free
surfaces in the MS (e.g. in the supply tank and in the reception tank) need a gas pressure atmosphere
(pressure > 0,5 bar) to prevent the release of gas dissolved in the liquid (commonly CO2, which also
prevents the oxidation of the liquid).
Usually, the MS has a pump which is supplied by the gas pressure in the supply tank, but the MS may
also be designed as a pressurized system.
The MS foresees a constant pressure during the whole delivery.
Specific instrumentation of a MS (given here in order of their installation)

fig.4 principal instrumentation of measuring system for beer, for delivery only
- Supply tank (normally pressurized by a CO2-atmosphere, common pressure > 0, 5 bar), consisting
of one or of several chambers, followed by suction lines with pump (pump additionally to the supply of
the meter by the gas pressure in the supply tank, in order to overcome the back pressure due to lines and
hoses and to vertical height).
- Optional equipment
temperature sensor, manometer, which may be installed at any site of the MS and which is not under
metrological control.
- Control unit for the transaction procedure
The control of sensors, activators and pumps as well as the selection and control of the path of the
liquid is usually performed by a store-programmed control (SPC) which may either be designed as a
separate unit or may be incorporated into the software/hardware part of the ECID.
OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 176 of 181

For the correct interaction of all parts of the instrumentation leading to a correct performance of the
MS, the SPC has a complex system of settable parameters (e.g. parameters for pressure control).
At any rate it must be possible to secure device specific parameters (such as the calibration factor of the
meter, ID of the measuring system and its components) against unauthorized modification.
- Gas elimination device
Due to the design of such MS (supply tank with pressurized atmosphere at a pressure > 0, 5 bar) the
pressure at the pump inlet is always > 1 bar and therefore no pressure drop at the pump inlet below
atmospheric pressure can occur; furthermore, de-gassing is not possible, and therefore air or gas slightly
mixed with the liquid will not occur. Even if de-gassed portions of carbonic acid might occur (e.g. due
to a Venturi effect), they will recombine immediately with the liquid.
So the gas elimination device must only be capable of removing gas pockets when the supply tank gets
empty (the gas elimination device works as a gas extractor); instead of a gas elimination device, the MS
may be equipped with an appropriate device which prevents the entry of gas from the supply tank (e.g.
level sensor at the outlet of the supply tank, which actuates the closure of a delivery valve).
Usually, manually operated closure devices are not present in the de-gassing line of the gas elimination
device. They may be acceptable in case that when the gas elimination device registers gas, the delivery
is automatically stopped until the gas is removed over the manually operated closure device.
- Equipment for the complete filling
Sight glass at the outlet side of the meter;
non return valve(s) to avoid backflow over the meter
pressure maintaining valve(s) to avoid de-gassing of the liquid
-

Hoses, with outlet valve

- Branches
Optionally, MS on road tankers may have a branch to pump back the liquid from a customers tank (see
fig. 5):
The liquid is sucked in from the hose via an own pipe to the suction side of the pump and delivered via
an own pipe downstream of the pump to the supply tank of the road tanker. Valves and an automatic
interlock safeguard that this reception procedure has no influence on the normal operation of the MS.
Measures are provided to safeguard that all parts of the MS (inclusive the hose) remain full after the
reception.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 177 of 181

fig.5 principal instrumentation of measuring system for beer, also for reception

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 178 of 181

Annex X.G
X.G.3 Metrological controls and performance tests for initial verification
Before conducting verification tests it is necessary to complete a full design evaluation of the
measuring system intended for the fuelling of aircraft.
For initial verification, the same test procedures shall be used as the system tests for type approval,
except the items G.4 and G.5.3.
For safety reasons, special grounding devices may be needed to ensure the safety and security of the
fuelling operations.
The requirements of sections 5.8.1.2, 5.8.2.3, 5.8.3.1.3, 5.8.3.2, 5.8.3.3.1 and 5.8.3.3.2 of R117-1 (as
applicable) shall be fulfilled.
X.G.3.1

Accuracy test of the complete measuring system

Testing is completed in accordance with Section 5. These tests include:


Accuracy tests at Qmin and ;
Tests on the minimum measured quantity (with maximum specified hose length);
X.G.4 Additional test procedures for the complete measuring system intended for the
refuelling of aircraft
X.G.4.1 Common tests for all measuring systems intended for refuelling of aircraft
X.G.4.1.1 Object of the test
To determine the accuracy of the quantity indication of the stationary or mobile measuring system
intended for refuelling of aircraft during delivery.
X.G.4.1.3 Test procedure
The delivery starts from an appropriate source of delivered liquid (pipeline or tank upstream of the
measuring system).
It is necessary to ensure that liquid level in tank remains above its lowest permissible level during
testing.
The test quantity shall be at least the volume delivered in one minute at the tested flowrate.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 179 of 181

A) Test procedure using a volumetric test measure:


1. Recirculate the system to stabilize the system temperature and pressure. Always stop
the delivery by the nozzle or by valve closest to the test measure.
2. (such as the or manual valve).
3. Wet and drain the test measure.
4. Reset the indication of the CID.
5. Start the filling procedure of the test measure from the liquid source at the service
flowrate (recommended to be approximately 0.8Qmax).
6. Read pt and Tt
7. Read Vi , Vs, Ts.
8. Calculate Vn and Evi.
9. Drain the test measure.
10. Evaluate, determine if the result is within the allowable MPE.
11. If yes, repeat steps 2 to 7, check if those results differ by more than 0.05 %.
12. If yes, repeat steps 2 to 7 once more
13. Then calculate the mean value v.
14. Fill in the test report.
Repeat this test procedure for flowrate 0.2Qmax and for flowrate Qmax.
Repeat this test procedure for the MMQ if it is smaller than 500 L.
For electronic meters, repeat the test procedure for flowrate 0.5Qmax, for at least one run.
Mean values of error between flowrate 0.2Qmax and for flowrate Qmax shall not exceed 0.2 %.
Repeatability shall not exceed 0.05 %.
B) Test procedure using a Master Meter:
1. Recirculate to stabilize system temperature and pressure. Always stop the delivery by the last
valve upstream the test measure.
2. Reset the indication of the Master Meter.
3. Reset the indication of the CID.
4. Start the filling procedure from the liquid source at service flowrate (recommended about
0.8Qmax).
5. Read pt and Tt.
6. Read Vi , Vs, Ts.
7. Calculate Vn and Evi.
8. Evaluate, determine if the result is within the allowable MPE.
9. If yes, repeat steps 2 to 7, check if those results differ by more than 0.05 %.
10. If yes, repeat steps 2 to 7 once more.
11. Then calculate the mean value v.
12. Fill in test report.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 180 of 181

Repeat this test procedure for flowrate 0.2Qmax and for flowrate Qmax.
Repeat this test procedure for the MMQ if it is smaller than 500 L.
For electronic meters, repeat the test procedure for flowrate 0.5Qmax, for at least one run.
Mean values of error between flowrate 0.2Qmax and for flowrate Qmax shall not exceed 0.2 %.
Repeatability shall not exceed 0.05 %.
Note: It is also possible to fulfill the requirements of this section gravimetrically.

OIML R117-2, 2CD, dated 21 December 2013

Page 181 of 181

You might also like